ix2700
User’s Guide
Version A
Thank you for selecting an Imagistics solution for
your document production and management needs.
The following information will help you get the most
productive and reliable use out of your system.
Imagistics brand supplies are designed for Imagistics
copiers, printers and fax machines to ensure
maximum product performance and quality.
Substituting other supplies may result in inferior
image quality and machine malfunction. To order
supplies call the Imagistics Supply Line at
1-800-462-6797. For faster service, please have your
machine model and serial number available before
calling.
Should your ix2700 develop a problem that cannot be
remedied
by
using
the
maintenance
or
troubleshooting procedures outlined in this manual,
please contact the Imagistics National Diagnostic
Center at 1-800-243-5556.
Model Number: ix2700
Serial Number:*
* The serial number is on the back of the unit.
Safety precautions
To use the machine safely
Save these instructions for later reference.
WARNING
There are high voltage
electrodes inside the machine.
Before you clean the machine
or clear a paper jam, make
sure you have unplugged the
power cord from the power
outlet.
Do not handle the plug with wet
hands. Doing this might cause
an electrical shock.
After you use the machine, some internal parts are extremely HOT!
To prevent injuries, be careful not to put your fingers in the area shown in
the illustration.
To prevent injuries, be careful
not to put your hands on the
edge of the machine under the
document cover.
To prevent injuries, be careful
not to put your fingers in the
area shown in the illustration.
i
To prevent injuries, be careful not to put
your fingers in the area shown in the
illustration.
WARNING
■ When you move the machine, grasp the side handholds that are under
the scanner. Do NOT carry the machine by holding it at the bottom.
■ Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Never touch
telephone wires or terminals that are not insulated unless the telephone
line has been disconnected at the wall jack. Never install telephone
wiring during a lightning storm. Never install a telephone jack in a wet
location unless the jack is specifically designed for a wet location.
■ Install equipment with a power cord near a socket/outlet that is easily
accessible.
■ To reduce the risk of shock or fire, use only a No. 26 AWG or larger
telecommunication line cord.
■ Do not use a telephone in the vicinity of gas leak to report leak.
■ Do not use this product near appliances that use water, in a wet
basement or near a swimming pool.
■ Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical
storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
Caution
■ Lightning and power surges can damage this product! We recommend
that you use a quality surge protection device on the AC power line and
on the telephone line, or unplug the lines during a lightning storm.
ii
Choosing a location
Place your machine on a flat, stable surface that is free of vibration
and shocks, such as a desk. Put the machine near a telephone jack
and a standard, grounded power outlet. Choose a location where the
temperature remains between 50°F and 95.5°F (10°-32.5°C).
Caution
■ Avoid placing your machine in a high-traffic area.
■ Do not place near heaters, air conditioners, water, chemicals, or
refrigerators.
■ Do not expose the machine to direct sunlight, excessive heat,
moisture, or dust.
■ Do not connect your machine to electrical outlets controlled by
wall switches or automatic timers.
■ Disruption of power can wipe out information in the machine’s
memory.
■ Do not connect your machine to electrical outlets on the same
circuit as large appliances or other Equipment that might disrupt
the power supply.
■ Avoid interference sources, such as speakers or the base units
of cordless phones.
NO !
NO !
NO !
iii
Quick Reference Guide
6
Sending faxes
Automatic Transmission
1 If it is not illuminated in
green, press
2
3
4
5
(Fax).
Place the original face up in
the ADF, or face down on
the scanner glass.
Enter the fax number using
One-Touch, Speed Dial,
Search or the dial pad.
Press Start .
If you are using the scanner
glass, press 2 or Start.
Transmission from ADF
You can send faxes in real time.
1 If it is not illuminated in
green, press
2
3
4
5
(Fax).
Place the original face up in
the ADF, or face down on
the scanner glass.
Press Menu, 2, 2, 5.
Press
or
to select
On, and then press Enter .
—OR—
For the next transmission
only, press
or
to
select Next Fax Only,
and then press Enter.
For the next fax only, press
or
to select Next
Fax:On , and then press
Enter.
7
8
Press 1 if you want to
choose more Entertings and
the LCD will return to the
Enterup send menu.
—OR—
Press 2 to fax.
Enter the fax number.
Press Start.
Receiving faxes
Select Answer Mode
1 Press Menu, 0,1.
or
to select
2 Press
Fax Only, Manual,
Fax/Tel and External
TAM and then press Enter .
Storing numbers
Storing One-Touch Dial
numbers
1 Press Menu, 2, 3, 1.
2 Press the One-Touch key
where you want to store the
number.
3 Enter a number (up to 20
digits), and then press
Enter.
4 Enter a name (or leave it
blank), and then press
Enter.
5 Press Stop.
v
Storing Speed Dial numbers
1 Press Menu, 2, 3, 2.
2 Enter a three-digit Speed
Dial number, and then press
Enter.
3 Enter a number (up to 20
digits), and then press
Enter.
4 Enter a name (or leave it
blank), and then press
Enter.
5 Press Stop.
Dialing operations
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Press Search/Speed Dial,
and then enter the first letter
of the name you’re looking for.
Press
or
to
search the memory.
Press Start .
Single copy
Press
(Copy) to
illuminate it in green.
2
3
Place the original face up in
the ADF, or face down on
the scanner glass.
Press Start .
Sorting multiple copies
(Using the ADF)
1
2
3
4
5
vi
(Fax).
Making copies
(Fax).
Place the original face up in
the ADF, or face down on
the scanner glass.
Press the One-Touch key of
the number you want to call
—OR—
Press Search/Speed Dial,
press #, and then press the
three-digit Speed Dial number.
Press Start.
If it is not illuminated in
green, press
1
One-Touch Dialing / Speed
Dialing
1 If it is not illuminated in
green, press
Using Search
Press
(Copy) to
illuminate it in green.
Place the original face up in
the ADF.
Use the dial pad to enter the
number of copies you want
(up to 99).
Press Sort.
Sort
icon appears on the
LCD.
Press Start .
Table of contens
1
2
Introduction .......................................................................... 1-1
Using this Guide ............................................................... 1-1
Finding information ................................................. 1-1
Symbols used in this Guide.................................... 1-1
Machine part names and operations .......................... 1-2
Control panel overview ..................................................... 1-5
Status LED indications ............................................. 1-10
About fax machines ........................................................ 1-12
Custom features ....................................................... 1-12
Do you have Voice Mail on the phone line? ......... 1-12
Why should there be problems?........................... 1-12
How can you avoid possible problems? ............... 1-12
Fax tones and handshake ........................................ 1-13
ECM (Error Correction Mode)................................... 1-14
Connecting the machine................................................. 1-14
Connecting an external telephone............................ 1-14
Connecting an external telephone answering machine
(TAM) ................................................................... 1-15
Sequence ............................................................. 1-15
Connections ......................................................... 1-17
Recording outgoing message (OGM) on an external
TAM.................................................................. 1-17
Special line considerations....................................... 1-18
Two-line phone system ........................................ 1-18
Converting telephone wall outlets ........................ 1-18
Installing machine, external two-line TAM and two-line
telephone.......................................................... 1-19
Multi-line connections (PBX) .................................... 1-20
If you are installing the machine to work with a
PBX .................................................................. 1-20
Custom features on your phone line......................... 1-20
Paper ..................................................................................... 2-1
About paper ...................................................................... 2-1
Type and size of paper............................................... 2-1
Recommended paper ................................................. 2-1
Choosing acceptable paper.............................................. 2-2
Paper capacity of the paper trays........................... 2-3
Paper specifications for each paper tray ................ 2-4
How to load paper ...................................................... 2-5
To load paper or other media in the paper tray ...... 2-5
vii
To load paper or other media in the multi-purpose tray
(MP tray).............................................................2-7
To use Automatic Duplexing for fax, copy and print
operations...............................................................2-9
3
4
5
viii
On-screen programming .....................................................3-1
User-friendly programming ...............................................3-1
Menu table .................................................................. 3-1
Memory Storage ......................................................... 3-1
Navigation keys ................................................................ 3-2
Getting started .....................................................................4-1
Initial Setup .......................................................................4-1
Setting the Date and Time ..........................................4-1
Setting the Machine ID ...............................................4-2
Entering text ........................................................... 4-3
Inserting spaces .....................................................4-3
Making corrections .................................................4-3
Repeating letters ....................................................4-3
Special characters and symbols ............................ 4-4
Setting Tone and Pulse dialing mode .........................4-4
System Setup ...................................................................4-5
Setting the Mode Timer .............................................. 4-5
Setting the Paper Type ...............................................4-5
Setting the Paper Size ................................................ 4-6
Setting the Ring Volume .............................................4-7
Setting the Beeper Volume......................................... 4-7
Setting the Speaker Volume ....................................... 4-8
Save Toner .................................................................4-8
Sleep Timer ................................................................ 4-9
Turning off the Scanner Lamp ....................................4-9
Setting the Tray Use for Copy mode ........................4-10
Setting the Tray Use for Fax mode...........................4-11
Setting the Tray Use for Printing Reports .................4-11
Setting the LCD Contrast ..........................................4-12
RX Settings ........................................................................... 5-1
Basic receiving operations................................................ 5-1
Choosing the Answer Mode........................................5-1
To select or change your Answer Mode .................5-2
Setting the Ring Count ...............................................5-2
Setting the F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only) ..........5-3
EXT. TEL. RX .............................................................5-4
Printing a reduced incoming fax
(Auto Reduction) .................................................... 5-5
Printing a fax from the memory .................................. 5-5
Setting the Print Density............................................. 5-6
Advanced receiving operations ........................................ 5-7
Operation from extension telephones......................... 5-7
For FAX/TEL mode only............................................. 5-7
Using a cordless external handset ............................. 5-8
Changing the remote codes ....................................... 5-8
Polling......................................................................... 5-9
Setting up Polling Receive ..................................... 5-9
Setting up Sequential Polling Receive ................. 5-10
Setting Duplex printing for Fax mode ....................... 5-10
Telephone services ........................................................ 5-11
Unique Ring.............................................................. 5-11
What does your telephone company’s
‘Unique Ring’ do?............................................. 5-11
What does ix2700’s ‘Unique Ring’ do?................. 5-11
Do you have Voice Mail?...................................... 5-12
Before you choose the ring pattern to register ..... 5-12
Registering the Unique Ring pattern ........................ 5-13
Turning off the Unique Ring ................................. 5-13
Caller ID.......................................................................... 5-14
Viewing Caller ID List ............................................... 5-15
Clearing a Caller ID stored in the memory ............... 5-15
Printing Caller ID List................................................ 5-15
6
TX Settings ........................................................................... 6-1
How to Fax ....................................................................... 6-1
Enter Fax mode.......................................................... 6-1
Faxing from the automatic document feeder (ADF) ... 6-1
Faxing from the ADF .............................................. 6-2
Faxing from the scanner glass ................................... 6-3
Faxing legal size originals from the scanner glass ..... 6-4
Out of Memory message ........................................ 6-4
Manual transmission................................................... 6-4
Automatic transmission .............................................. 6-5
This is the easiest way to send a fax...................... 6-5
Sending a fax at the end of a conversation ................ 6-5
Basic sending operations ................................................. 6-6
Sending faxes using multiple settings ........................ 6-6
Contrast ...................................................................... 6-6
Fax Resolution............................................................ 6-7
Manual and automatic fax Redial ............................... 6-8
ix
Dual Access ...............................................................6-9
Real Time Transmission ...........................................6-10
Checking job status ..................................................6-11
Canceling a job while scanning the original..............6-11
Canceling a scheduled job........................................6-11
Advanced sending operations ........................................6-12
Composing the electronic Cover Sheet ....................6-12
Composing your own comments .......................... 6-13
Cover sheet for the next fax only.......................... 6-14
Send a cover sheet for all faxes ...........................6-15
Using a printed cover sheet ......................................6-15
Broadcasting.............................................................6-16
Overseas Mode ........................................................6-18
Delayed Send ...........................................................6-19
Delayed Batch Transmission ....................................6-20
Setting up Polled Transmission ................................6-21
Memory Security ....................................................... 6-22
Setting up the password....................................... 6-22
Turning Memory Security on ................................6-23
Turning Memory Security off..................................... 6-23
7
8
x
Auto Dial numbers and dialing options .............................7-1
Storing numbers for easy dialing ......................................7-1
Storing One-Touch Dial numbers ...............................7-1
Storing Speed Dial numbers....................................... 7-2
Changing One-Touch and Speed Dial numbers.........7-3
Setting up Groups for Broadcasting............................ 7-4
Dialing options .................................................................. 7-5
Search ........................................................................7-5
One-Touch Dialing......................................................7-5
Speed Dialing .............................................................7-6
Manual dialing.............................................................7-6
Using an external telephone ....................................... 7-6
Access codes and credit card numbers......................7-7
Pause ......................................................................... 7-8
Tone or Pulse .............................................................7-8
Remote Fax Options ............................................................8-1
Fax Forwarding .................................................................8-1
Programming a Fax Forwarding number ....................8-1
Setting Remote Retrieval .................................................. 8-2
Local Print...............................................................8-2
Using R R Passcode...................................................8-3
Remote commands.....................................................8-4
Retrieving fax messages ............................................ 8-5
Changing your Fax Forwarding number ..................... 8-5
9
10
11
Printing reports .................................................................... 9-1
Machine settings and journal............................................ 9-1
Customizing the Job Status Report ............................ 9-1
Setting the Journal Interval......................................... 9-2
Printing reports ........................................................... 9-3
To print a report ...................................................... 9-3
Making copies .................................................................... 10-1
Using the machine as a copier ....................................... 10-1
Enter Copy mode...................................................... 10-1
Temporary copy settings ...................................... 10-2
Making a single copy from the ADF.......................... 10-3
Making multiple copies from the ADF....................... 10-3
Single or multiple copies using the scanner glass.... 10-4
Out of Memory message .......................................... 10-5
Using the copy keys
(Temporary settings) ................................................... 10-6
Enlarge/Reduce........................................................ 10-7
Copy Mode (type of original) .................................... 10-8
Sorting copies using the ADF................................... 10-9
Contrast .................................................................... 10-9
Tray Select ............................................................. 10-10
Duplex/N in 1.......................................................... 10-11
Duplex/N in 1 copy ................................................. 10-12
N in 1 copy ......................................................... 10-12
Poster ................................................................. 10-13
Duplex (1 in 1) .................................................... 10-13
Duplex (2 in 1) and Duplex (4 in 1) ..................... 10-15
Changing the default copy settings .............................. 10-16
Copy Mode ............................................................. 10-16
Contrast .................................................................. 10-16
Using the Machine as a printer ......................................... 11-1
Using the ix2700 printer driver........................................ 11-1
How to print your document............................................ 11-2
Simultaneous printing and faxing ................................... 11-3
Two-sided printing (Duplex Printing) ........................ 11-3
Automatic Duplex Printing .................................... 11-3
Manual Duplex Printing ........................................ 11-4
Face-down output tray.............................................. 11-4
Printing on plain paper.............................................. 11-5
xi
The MP tray ..........................................................11-5
Printing on thicker paper and card stock ..................11-6
The multi-purpose tray (MP tray).......................... 11-6
Printing on envelopes ...............................................11-8
Printer operation keys................................................... 11-11
Job Cancel.............................................................. 11-11
Secure key.............................................................. 11-11
Setting the Emulation Selection..............................11-12
Printing the Internal Font List..................................11-13
Printing the Print Configuration List ........................ 11-13
Restoring factory default settings ...........................11-13
12
13
xii
Printer driver settings ........................................................12-1
Printer driver settings ......................................................12-1
How to access the printer driver settings ........................12-1
Features in the Native Driver ..........................................12-2
Basic tab ...................................................................12-2
Paper Size ............................................................12-3
Multiple Page........................................................12-3
Orientation ............................................................12-3
Copies ..................................................................12-4
Media Type...........................................................12-4
Advanced tab............................................................12-5
Print Quality ..........................................................12-5
Duplex Printing ..................................................... 12-7
Watermark ............................................................12-8
Page Setting....................................................... 12-10
Device Options ................................................... 12-11
Secure Print ............................................................ 12-11
Accessories tab ..................................................12-15
Features in the PS printer driver
(For Windows ®)..........................................................12-16
Ports tab .................................................................12-16
Device Settings tab.................................................12-17
Layout tab ...............................................................12-18
Booklet (For Windows® 2000/XP).......................12-18
Paper / Quality tab ..................................................12-19
Advanced Options ..................................................12-20
How to scan using Windows® ...........................................13-1
Scanning a document ....................................................13-1
TWAIN compliant ......................................................13-1
How to access the Scanner ......................................13-2
Scanning a document into the PC ............................ 13-3
Scanning a whole page ........................................ 13-3
PreScanning to crop a portion you want to scan .. 13-4
Settings in the Scanner window ............................... 13-6
Image Type .......................................................... 13-6
Resolution ............................................................ 13-6
Scan Type ............................................................ 13-7
Brightness ............................................................ 13-7
Contrast ................................................................ 13-7
Document Size ..................................................... 13-8
Scanning a document
(For Windows® XP only) ............................................ 13-10
WIA compliant ........................................................ 13-10
How to access the scanner .................................... 13-10
Scanning a document into the PC .......................... 13-11
Scanning a document using the ADF ................. 13-11
PreScanning to crop a portion you want to scan using
the scanner glass ........................................... 13-13
Scanner Utility .................................................... 13-15
Using the scan key (For USB or Parallel interface cable
users)......................................................................... 13-16
Scan to E-mail ........................................................ 13-17
Scan to Image ........................................................ 13-17
Scan to OCR .......................................................... 13-18
Scan to File............................................................. 13-18
Using ScanSoft® PaperPort® and TextBridge ® OCR.... 13-19
Viewing items ......................................................... 13-20
Organizing your items in folders............................. 13-21
Quick links to other applications............................. 13-21
ScanSoft® TextBridge® OCR lets you convert image text
into text you can edit .......................................... 13-22
You can Import items from other applications ........ 13-22
You can Export items in other formats ................... 13-23
Exporting an image file ....................................... 13-23
How to Uninstall PaperPort® and ScanSoft®
TextBridge ® ........................................................ 13-24
14
Using the SmartUI for Windows® 95/98/98SE/Me/2000
Professional and Windows NT® WS 4.0 ........................... 14-1
SmartUI .................................................................... 14-1
AutoLoad the SmartUI .............................................. 14-2
How to turn off AutoLoad.......................................... 14-2
SmartUI features ............................................................ 14-3
Auto Configuration.................................................... 14-3
Scan key operations................................................. 14-4
xiii
Copy operations........................................................14-4
PC-Fax operation......................................................14-4
Scanner settings for Scan, Copy and
PC-Fax buttons..................................................... 14-5
Global settings ..........................................................14-5
Setting up the scanner configurations ......................14-6
Perform an operation from the SmartUI screen ........14-7
Scan to File .....................................................................14-8
To access Scan to File Configurations screen .........14-8
Scanner settings ....................................................... 14-8
Destination folder ......................................................14-9
Scan to E-mail .............................................................. 14-10
To access Scan to E-mail Configurations screen ...14-10
Scanner settings ..................................................... 14-10
E-mail application ................................................... 14-11
Send to Options ......................................................14-11
Scan to OCR (Word Processor) ................................... 14-12
To access Scan to OCR Configurations screen .....14-12
Scanner settings ..................................................... 14-12
Word Processor ......................................................14-13
Scan to Image...............................................................14-14
To access Scan to Image Configurations screen ...14-14
Scanner Settings ....................................................14-14
Target Application................................................... 14-14
Copy .............................................................................14-15
To access the Copy Configurations screen ............14-15
Scanner settings ..................................................... 14-15
Number of copies....................................................14-15
Send a fax..................................................................... 14-16
To access the Send a fax Configurations screen ...14-16
Scanner settings ..................................................... 14-16
PC-FAX Settings..................................................... 14-17
15
xiv
Using the Windows®-Based SmartUI ...............................15-1
SmartUI...........................................................................15-1
AutoLoad the SmartUI .............................................. 15-2
How to turn off Auto Load .........................................15-2
SmartUI features.............................................................15-3
Auto Configuration ....................................................15-4
Hardware Section: Changing the Scan to button
configuration ................................................................ 15-5
Scan to E-mail ..........................................................15-6
Scan to File...............................................................15-7
Scan to Image ..........................................................15-8
Scan to OCR .......................................................... 15-10
Software Section .......................................................... 15-12
Scan ....................................................................... 15-13
Copy ....................................................................... 15-13
Fax.......................................................................... 15-14
Custom ................................................................... 15-14
Scan to File................................................................... 15-15
Scan to E-mail .............................................................. 15-17
File attachments ..................................................... 15-19
Scanner settings..................................................... 15-20
Scan to OCR (Word Processing program) ................... 15-21
Scan to Graphics application
(example: Microsoft Paint)......................................... 15-23
Copy ....................................................................... 15-25
Fax setting (PC-Fax using the ix2700 Fax Driver)........ 15-27
FAX settings ........................................................... 15-28
Custom: User-defined buttons...................................... 15-30
Customizing a user-defined button......................... 15-30
1. Select the Scan Action ................................... 15-30
2. Select Configuration for the Scan Type.......... 15-31
3. Select Scan Settings. ..................................... 15-35
16
17
Using Remote Setup .......................................................... 16-1
Remote Setup................................................................. 16-1
Using PC-FAX software ..................................................... 17-1
PC-FAX sending............................................................. 17-1
Setting up user information....................................... 17-2
Sending setup........................................................... 17-3
Outside line access .................................................. 17-4
Include header.......................................................... 17-4
Addressbook file....................................................... 17-4
User interface ........................................................... 17-5
Simple style .......................................................... 17-5
Facsimile style ...................................................... 17-5
Speed Dial setup ............................................................ 17-6
The Address Book.................................................... 17-7
Setting up a Member in the Address Book............... 17-8
Setting up a Group for Broadcasting ........................ 17-9
Editing Member information.................................... 17-10
Deleting a Member or Group.................................. 17-10
Exporting the Address Book................................... 17-10
Importing to the Address Book ............................... 17-12
Setting up a Cover Page ........................................ 17-13
xv
You can enter information in each field ..................17-14
Sending a file as a PC-FAX using the
Facsimile style ....................................................17-15
Redial .................................................................17-16
Sending a file as a PC-FAX using the Simple style 17-16
Setting up PC-FAX receiving
(Windows ® 95/98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional and
Windows NT ® WS 4.0 only) .......................................17-18
Running PC-FAX Receiving ................................... 17-18
Setting up your PC..................................................17-18
Viewing new PC-FAX messages ............................ 17-19
Receiving a fax into the PC
(Windows ® XP only)................................................... 17-20
How to receive a fax automatically .........................17-20
How to view the received faxes ..............................17-25
18
xvi
Using your Machine with a Macintosh® ...........................18-1
Setting up your USB-equipped Apple ® Macintosh® .......18-1
Using the printer driver with your Apple ® Macintosh®
(Mac OS 8.6-9.2) ......................................................... 18-2
Using the Printer Driver with Your Apple® Macintosh®
(Mac OS X) ..................................................................18-5
Choosing page setup options ................................... 18-5
Specific settings........................................................18-6
Using the PS driver with your Apple ® Macintosh® .......... 18-8
For Mac OS 8.6 to 9.2 users..................................... 18-8
For Mac OS X users ...............................................18-12
Sending a fax from your Macintosh ® application .......... 18-15
For Mac OS 8.6-9.2 users ......................................18-15
For Mac OS X users ...............................................18-17
Drag a vCard from the Mac® OS X Address Book
application ......................................................18-19
Using the TWAIN scanner driver with your Macintosh ® 18-21
Accessing the scanner............................................ 18-21
Scanning an image into your Macintosh ® ...............18-22
Scanning a whole page ......................................18-22
PreScanning an image ...........................................18-23
Settings in the Scanner window..............................18-24
Image..................................................................18-24
Scanning Area ....................................................18-26
Business Card Size ............................................ 18-26
Adjusting the Image............................................ 18-27
Remote Setup (Mac OS ® X) .........................................18-28
19
20
21
Network Scanning
(Windows® 98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional
and XP only) ....................................................................... 19-1
Registering your PC with the machine ..................... 19-1
Using the Scan key......................................................... 19-4
Scan to E-mail (PC).................................................. 19-4
Scan to E-mail (E-mail server).................................. 19-5
Scan to Image .......................................................... 19-6
Scan to OCR ............................................................ 19-7
Scan to File............................................................... 19-8
Network PC-FAX software ................................................ 20-1
Enable Network PC-FAX .......................................... 20-1
Sending setup ...................................................... 20-1
Extra options in Address Book ............................. 20-3
Installing Network PC-FAX ....................................... 20-4
Windows® 95/98/98SE and Me users .................. 20-4
Using the Network PC-FAX software ....................... 20-5
Quick Tips: ........................................................... 20-5
Sending a Network PC-FAX from your Macintosh ®
application ............................................................ 20-6
For Mac OS 8.6-9.2 users .................................... 20-6
For Mac OS X users............................................. 20-6
Important information ....................................................... 21-1
Standard telephone and FCC Notices
These notices are in effect on models sold and used
only in the United States. ..................................... 21-1
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Declaration
of Conformity (USA only)...................................... 21-3
Important .............................................................. 21-4
Important – about the interface cable ................... 21-4
Industry Canada Compliance Statement
(Canada only) ....................................................... 21-4
International ENERGY STAR®
Compliance Statement ......................................... 21-4
Laser safety.............................................................. 21-4
FDA regulations........................................................ 21-5
Important safety instructions........................................... 21-6
Trademarks .................................................................... 21-8
xvii
22
23
G
xviii
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance ..................... 22-1
Troubleshooting .............................................................22-1
Error messages ........................................................22-1
Original jams.............................................................22-4
Original is jammed in the top of the ADF unit. ......22-4
Original is jammed inside the ADF unit. ...............22-5
Paper jams................................................................ 22-6
Paper is jammed in the duplex tray ....................22-11
If you are having difficulty with your machine .........22-13
Improving the print quality.......................................22-17
Packing and shipping the machine ...............................22-21
Routine maintenance ....................................................22-24
Cleaning the scanner.............................................. 22-24
Cleaning the printer ................................................22-25
Cleaning the drum unit............................................ 22-26
Replacing the toner cartridge..................................22-27
How to replace the toner cartridge.......................... 22-28
Replacing the drum unit.......................................... 22-33
Page Counter .........................................................22-36
Optional accessories ......................................................... 23-1
Memory board.................................................................23-1
Installing the optional memory board........................23-2
Network (LAN) board ......................................................23-4
Before starting installation ........................................23-5
Step 1: Hardware installation....................................23-5
Step 2: Connecting the Network board to an Unshielded
Twisted Pair 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX Ethernet
Network ................................................................ 23-8
LED....................................................................... 23-8
TEST SWITCH ..................................................... 23-9
Lower Tray................................................................ 23-9
Glossary ............................................................................... G-1
S
24
25
Specifications ......................................................................S-1
Product description...........................................................S-1
General.............................................................................S-1
Print media .......................................................................S-2
Copy .................................................................................S-2
Fax....................................................................................S-3
Scanner ............................................................................S-4
Printer ...............................................................................S-5
Interfaces..........................................................................S-5
Computer requirements....................................................S-6
Index ...................................................................................... I-1
Remote Retrieval Access card .......................................... R-1
xix
1
Introduction
Using this Guide
Thank you for buying an Imagistics ix2700. Your ix2700 is simple to
use, with LCD screen instructions to guide you through programming
it. You can make the most of your machine by taking a few minutes to
read this Guide.
Finding information
All the chapter headings and subheadings are listed in the Table of
Contents. You will be able to find information about a specific feature
or operation by checking the Index at the back of this Guide.
Symbols used in this Guide
Throughout this Guide you’ll see special symbols alerting you to
important warnings, notes and actions. To make things clearer and
to help you press the correct keys, we used special fonts and added
some of the messages that will appear in the LCD.
Bold
Bold typeface identifies specific keys on the
machine control panel.
Italics
Italicized typeface emphasizes an important point
or refers you to a related topic.
Courier
New
Courier New typeface identifies the messages on
the LCD of the machine.
Warnings inform you what to do to avoid possible personal
injury.
Cautions specify procedures you must follow or avoid to
prevent possible damage to the machine.
Notes tell you how you should respond to a situation that may arise or
give tips about how the current operation works with other features.
Improper Setup alerts you to devices and operations that are not
compatible with the machine.
INTRODUCTION 1 - 1
Machine part names and operations
■ Front view
5 Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
6 ADF Document Support
Extension
4 Control Panel
7 ADF Document
Output Support
Flap
3 Face-down Output Tray
Support Flap with Extension
8 Document Cover
2 Front Cover Release Button
1 Multi-purpose Tray (MP Tray)
9 Power Switch
10 Front Cover
11 Paper Tray (Upper Tray)
No. Name
Description
1
Multi-purpose Tray (MP Tray)
Load paper here.
2
Front Cover Release Button
Press it to open the front cover.
3
Face-down Output Tray Support Flap
with Extension (Support Flap)
Unfold it to prevent the printed paper
from sliding off the machine.
4
Control Panel
Use the keys and display to control
the machine.
5
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Use the ADF unit for multiple page
originals.
6
ADF Document Support Extension
Place the original here to use the
ADF unit.
7
ADF Document Output Support Flap
Unfold to prevent the scanned pages
from sliding off the machine.
8
Document Cover
Open to place the original on the
scanner glass.
9
Power Switch
Switch it on or off.
10
Front Cover
Open to install a toner cartridge or
drum unit.
11
Paper Tray (Upper Tray)
Load paper here.
1 - 2 INTRODUCTION
■ Back view
16 ADF Cover
15 Face-up Output Tray
(Back Output Tray)
17 Telephone Line Jack
14 AC Power Connector
18 USB Interface
Connector
13 Duplex Tray
12 Paper Adjustment Lever
for Duplex Printing
19 Parallel Interface
Connector
20 External Telephone
Line Jack
No. Name
Description
12
Paper Adjustment Lever for
Duplex Printing
Use to match your paper size for duplex
printing.
13
Duplex Tray
Slide out to remove paper jammed inside
the machine.
14
AC Power Connector
Connect the AC Power Connector here.
15
Face-up Output Tray
(Back Output Tray)
Open it when thicker paper is placed in the
MP tray.
16
ADF Cover
Open to remove paper jammed inside the
ADF unit.
17
Telephone Line Jack
Plug the line cord supplied with the machine
into here.
18
USB Interface Connector
Connect the USB Cable here.
19
Parallel Interface Connector
Connect the Parallel Cable here.
20
External Telephone Line Jack
Plug in the modular plug on the external
telephone line here.
INTRODUCTION 1 - 3
■ Inside view (Document cover open)
24 Document Cover
25 White Film
23 Scanner Lock Lever
22 Glass Strip
21 Document
Guidelines
26 Scanner Glass
No. Name
Description
21
Document Guidelines
Use to center the original on the scanner glass.
22
Glass Strip
This is used to scan the original when using the
ADF.
23
Scanner Lock Lever
Use to lock/unlock the scanner when relocating the
machine.
24
Document Cover
Open to place the original on the scanner glass.
25
White Film
Clean it for good quality copying and scanning.
26
Scanner Glass
Place the original to be scanned here.
1 - 4 INTRODUCTION
12
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
10
11
Control panel overview
INTRODUCTION 1 - 5
1
2
3
4
7
1 Shift
To access memory locations 21
through 40 in the One-Touch keys
hold down the Shift key.
2 One-Touch keys
These 20 keys give you instant
access to 40 previously stored dial
numbers.
3 Print keys:
Secure
Lets you print out data saved in
memory by entering your four-digit
password.
Job cancel
Clears data from the printer
memory.
1 - 6 INTRODUCTION
4
Status LED
(Light-Emitting Diode)
The LED will flash and change color
depending on the machine status.
5 5-Line Liquid Crystal Display
(LCD)
Displays messages on the screen to
help you to set up and use your
machine.
5
6
6 Mode keys:
Fax
Lets you access Fax mode.
Copy
Lets you access Copy mode.
Scan
Lets you access Scan mode.
7 Fax and telephone keys:
Monitor
Press before dialing if you want to
make sure a fax machine will
answer, and then press Start.
Resolution
Sets the resolution when you send a
fax.
Search/Speed Dial
Lets you look up numbers that are
stored in the dialing memory. It also
lets you dial stored numbers by
pressing # and a three-digit number.
Redial/Pause
Redials the last number you called.
It also inserts a pause in auto dial
numbers.
INTRODUCTION 1 - 7
8
9
10
11
12
8 Navigation keys:
Menu
Lets you access the Menu to
program.
Enter
Lets you store your settings in the
machine.
Clear/Back
Deletes entered data or lets you exit
the menu by pressing repeatedly.
1 - 8 INTRODUCTION
or
Press to scroll forward or backward
to a menu selection.
When using the speaker or ring, you
can press these keys to adjust the
volume in fax mode.
or
Press to scroll through the menus
and options.
Also, you can use these keys to do
a numerial search for the names of
stored numbers in fax mode.
9 Copy keys
0 Dial Pad
(Temporary settings):
Use these keys to dial telephone
and fax numbers and as a keyboard
for entering information into the
machine.
The # key lets you temporarily
switch the dialing mode during a
telephone call from Pulse to Tone.
Enlarge/Reduce
Lets you reduce or enlarge copies
depending upon the ratio you
select.
Contrast
Lets you make a copy that is lighter
or darker than the original.
Mode
Lets you select the copy mode for
your type of original.
Tray Select
You can select which tray you would
like to use for the next copy.
A
Stop
Stops a fax, copy and scan
operation or exits from the menu.
B
Start
Lets you start sending faxes,
making copies or scanning.
Sort
Lets you sort multiple copies using
the ADF.
Duplex/N in 1
You can choose Duplex to copy on
both sides of the paper or N in 1 to
copy 2 or 4 pages onto one page.
INTRODUCTION 1 - 9
Status LED indications
The Status LED (Light Emitting Diode) will flash and change color
depending on the machine status.
The LED indications shown in the table below are used in the
illustrations in this chapter.
LED
LED status
LED is off.
LED is on.
Green
Yellow
Red
LED is blinking.
Green
LED
Yellow
Red
machine status
Description
Sleep Mode
The power switch is off or the machine is in
Sleep mode.
Warming Up
The machine is warming up for printing.
Ready
The machine is ready to print.
Receiving Data
The machine is either receiving data from the
computer, processing data in memory or
printing data.
Data Remaining in
Memory
Print data remains in the machine memory.
Green
Green
Yellow
Yellow
1 - 10 INTRODUCTION
LED
machine status
Description
Service error
Follow the steps below.
1. Turn off the power switch.
2. Wait a few seconds, and then turn it back on
and try to print again.
If you cannot clear the error and see the same
service call indication after turning the machine
back on, please call the Imagistics National
Diagnostic Center at 1-800-243-5556 (In USA).
Cover open
The cover is open. Close the cover. (See Error
messages on page 22-1.)
Toner empty
Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
(See Replacing the toner cartridge on page
22-27.)
Paper error
Put paper in the tray or clear the paper jam.
Check the LCD message. (See Troubleshooting
on page 22-1.)
Scan lock
Check that the scanner lock lever is released.
(See Scanner Lock Lever on page 1-4.)
Others
Check the LCD message. (See Troubleshooting
on page 22-1.)
Out of memory
Memory is full. (See Error messages on page
22-1.)
Red
Red
When the power switch is off or the machine is in Sleep mode,
the LED is off.
INTRODUCTION 1 - 11
About fax machines
Custom features
Do you have Voice Mail on the phone line?
If you have Voice Mail on the phone line where you will install your
new machine, there is a strong possibility that Voice Mail and the
machine may conflict with each other while receiving incoming calls.
Why should there be problems?
Since both the machine and Voice Mail will pick up the call, after the
number of rings you have set, each of them has the ability to keep
the other from receiving calls.
For example, if your Voice Mail is set to answer after two rings and
your machine is set to answer after four, your Voice Mail will stop
your machine from receiving faxes.
If you set Voice Mail and the machine to answer after the same
number of rings, there is no way of knowing which one will answer
first. It is important to remember that neither Voice Mail nor the
machine can pass the call back to the other after the call has been
answered.
How can you avoid possible problems?
A very good way to avoid problems like the one mentioned, is to get
a second phone number on your present phone line.
Many people with Voice Mail choose an alternative service, which is
called “Unique Ring”, and they are very satisfied with it. (See Unique
Ring on page 5-11.)
Another way to avoid possible problems is to replace your Voice Mail
with an answering machine. Your machine is designed to work with
an answering machine or TAM (telephone answering machine).
(See Connecting an external telephone answering machine (TAM)
on page 1-15.)
1 - 12 INTRODUCTION
Fax tones and handshake
When someone is sending a fax, the machine sends fax calling tones
(CNG tones). These are quiet, intermittent beeps every 4-seconds.
You’ll hear them after you dial and press Start and they will continue
for about 60 seconds after dialing. During that time, the sending
machine must begin the “handshake”, or connection, with the
receiving machine.
Each time you use automatic procedures to send a fax, you are
sending CNG tones over the phone line. You’ll soon learn to listen for
these quiet beeps each time you answer a phone on your fax line, so
you will know if you are receiving a fax message.
The receiving fax responds with fax receiving tones, which are loud,
chirping sounds. A receiving fax chirps for about 40 seconds over the
phone line, and the LCD shows Receiving.
If your machine is set to the Fax Only mode, it will answer every call
automatically with fax receiving tones. If the other person hangs up,
your machine will continue to send the “chirps” for about 40 seconds,
and the LCD continues to show Receiving. To cancel receiving,
press Stop.
The fax ‘handshake’ is the time in which the sending machine’s CNG
tones and the receiving machines “chirps” overlap. This must be for
at least 2 to 4 seconds, so both machines can understand how each
is sending and receiving the fax. The handshake cannot begin until
the call is answered, and the CNG tones only last for about 60
seconds after the number is dialed. So it is important for the receiving
machine to answer the call in as few rings as possible.
When you have an external Telephone Answering machine
(TAM) on your fax line, your TAM will decide the number of rings
before the call is answered.
Pay special attention to the directions for connecting a TAM in
this chapter. (See Connecting an external telephone answering
machine (TAM) on page 1-15.)
INTRODUCTION 1 - 13
ECM (Error Correction Mode)
The Error Correction Mode (ECM) is a way for the machine to check
a fax transmission while it is in progress. If the machine detects
errors during fax transmission, if resends the pages of the fax that
had an error. ECM transmissions are only possible between fax
machines that both have this feature. If they do, you may send and
receive fax messages that are continuously being checked by the
machine.
Your machine must have enough memory for this feature to work.
Connecting the machine
Connecting an external telephone
Although your machine does not have a handset, you can connect a
separate telephone (or telephone answering device) directly to your
machine as shown in the diagram below.
Connect the modular plug on the telephone’s line cord to the jack
labeled EXT. in the back of the machine.
Whenever this phone (or TAM) is in use, the LCD shows
Telephone.
1 - 14 INTRODUCTION
Connecting an external telephone answering
machine (TAM)
Sequence
You may choose to connect an answering device. However, when
you have an external TAM on the same telephone line as the
machine, the TAM answers all calls and the machine “listens” for fax
calling (CNG) tones. If it hears them, the machine takes over the call
and receives the fax. If it doesn’t hear CNG tones, the machine lets
the TAM continue playing your outgoing message so your caller can
leave you a voice message.
The TAM must answer within four rings (the recommended setting is
two rings). The machine cannot hear CNG tones until the TAM has
answered the call, and with four rings there are only 8 to 10 seconds
of CNG tones left for the fax “handshake”. Make sure you carefully
follow the instructions in this guide for recording your outgoing
message. We do not recommend using the toll saver feature on your
external answering machine if it exceeds five rings.
If you do not receive all your faxes, reduce the Ring Delay
setting on your external TAM.
If You Subscribe to your Telephone Company’s Unique Ring
Service:
You may connect an external TAM to a separate wall jack only
if you subscribe to your telephone company’s Unique Ring
service, have registered the unique ring pattern on your
machine, and use that number as a fax number. The
recommended setting is four rings on the external TAM when
you have the telephone company’s Unique Ring Service.
If You Do Not Subscribe to Unique Ring Service:
You must plug your TAM into the EXT. jack of your machine. If
your TAM is plugged into a wall jack, both your machine and the
TAM will try to control the phone line. (See illustration on the
next page.)
INTRODUCTION 1 - 15
Do not connect a TAM elsewhere on the same phone line
(unless you have the Unique Ring service).
TAM
TAM
1 - 16 INTRODUCTION
Connections
The external TAM must be plugged into the back of the machine, into
the jack labeled EXT. Your machine cannot work properly if you plug
the TAM into a wall jack (unless you are using Unique Ring).
1 Plug the telephone line cord from the wall jack into the back of
the machine, in the jack labeled LINE.
2 Plug the telephone line cord from your external TAM into the
back of the machine, in the jack labeled EXT. (Make sure this
cord is connected to the TAM at the TAM’s telephone line jack,
and not its telephone jack.)
3 Set your external TAM to four rings or less. (The machine’s Ring
Count setting does not apply.)
4 Record the outgoing message on your external TAM.
5 Set the TAM to answer calls.
6 Set the Answer Mode to External TAM.
(See Choosing the Answer Mode on page 5-1.)
Recording outgoing message (OGM) on an external TAM
Timing is important in recording this message. The message sets up
the ways to handle both manual and automatic fax reception.
1 Record 5 seconds of silence at the beginning of your message.
(This allows your machine time to listen for the fax CNG tones
of automatic transmissions before they stop.)
2 Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.
3 End your 20-second message by giving your Fax Receive Code
for people sending manual faxes. For example:
“After the beep, leave a message or send a fax by pressing
51 and Start.”
We recommend beginning your OGM with an initial 5-second
silence because the machine cannot hear fax tones over a
resonant or loud voice. You may try omitting this pause, but if your
machine has trouble receiving, then you must rerecord the OGM
to include it.
INTRODUCTION 1 - 17
Special line considerations
Two-line phone system
A two-line phone system is nothing more than two separate phone
numbers on the same wall outlet. The two phone numbers can be on
separate jacks (RJ11) or combined into one jack (RJ14). Your
machine must be plugged into an RJ11 jack. RJ11 and RJ14 jacks
may be equal in size and appearance and both may contain four
wires (black, red, green, yellow). To test the type of jack, plug in a
two-line phone and see if it can access both lines. If it can, you must
separate the line for your machine. (See EXT. TEL. RX on page 5-4.)
Converting telephone wall outlets
There are three ways to convert to an RJ11 jack. The first two ways
may require assistance from the telephone company. You can
change the wall outlets from one RJ14 jack to two RJ11 jacks. Or,
you can have an RJ11 wall outlet installed and slave or jump one of
the phone numbers to it.
The third way is the easiest: Buy a triplex adapter. You can plug a
triplex adapter into an RJ14 outlet. It separates the wires into two
separate RJ11 jacks (Line 1, Line 2) and a third RJ14 jack (Lines 1
and 2). If your machine is on Line 1, plug the machine into L1 of the
triplex adapter. If your machine is on Line 2, plug it into L2 of the triple
adapter.
Triplex Adapter
RJ14
RJ11
RJ14
1 - 18 INTRODUCTION
Installing machine, external two-line TAM and two-line
telephone
When you are installing an external two-line telephone answering
machine (TAM) and a two-line telephone, your machine must be
isolated on one line at both the wall jack and at the TAM. The most
common connection is to put the machine on Line 2, which is
explained in the following steps. The back of the two-line TAM must
have two telephone jacks: one labeled L1 or L1/L2, and the other
labeled L2. You will need at least three telephone line cords, the one
that came with your machine and two for your external two-line TAM.
You will need a fourth line cord if you add a two-line telephone.
1 Place the two-line TAM and the two-line telephone next to your
machine.
2 Plug one end of the telephone line cord for your machine into the
L2 jack of the triplex adapter. Plug the other end into the LINE
jack on the back of the machine.
3 Plug one end of the first telephone line cord for your TAM into
the L1 jack of the triplex adapter. Plug the other end into the L1
or L1/L2 jack of the two-line TAM.
4 Plug one end of the second telephone line cord for your TAM
into the L2 jack of the two-line TAM. Plug the other end into the
EXT. jack on the left side of the machine.
Triplex Adapter
External Two Line TAM
Two Line Phone
FAX
You can keep two-line telephones on other wall outlets as always.
There are two ways to add a two-line telephone to the machine’s wall
outlet. You can plug the telephone line cord from the two-line
telephone into the L1+L2 jack of the triplex adapter. Or, you can plug
the two-line telephone into the TEL jack of the two-line TAM.
INTRODUCTION 1 - 19
Multi-line connections (PBX)
Most offices use a central telephone system. While it is often
relatively simple to connect the machine to a key system or a PBX
(Private Branch Exchange), we suggest that you contact the
company that installed your telephone system and ask them to
connect the machine for you. It is advisable to have a separate line
for the machine. You can then leave the Receive Mode set to FAX
Only to receive faxes any time of the day or night.
If the machine is to be connected to a multi-line system, ask your
installer to connect the unit to the last line on the system. This
prevents the unit from being activated each time a telephone call is
received.
As with all fax units, this machine must be connected to a two
wire system. If your line has more than two wires, proper
connection of the machine cannot be made.
If you are installing the machine to work with a PBX
1
2
It is not guaranteed that the unit will operate correctly under all
circumstances with a PBX. Any cases of difficulty should be
reported first to the company that handles your PBX.
If all incoming calls will be answered by a switchboard operator,
it is recommended that the Receive Mode be set to Manual. All
incoming calls should initially be regarded as telephone calls.
Custom features on your phone line
If you have Voice Mail, Call Waiting, Caller ID, RingMaster, an
answering service, an alarm system or other custom feature on one
phone line it may create a problem with the operation of your
machine. (See Custom features on page 1-12.)
1 - 20 INTRODUCTION
2
Paper
About paper
Type and size of paper
The machine loads paper from the installed paper tray,
multi-purpose tray or optional lower tray.
Recommended paper
Plain Paper:
Imagistics 471-1 Letter
Imagistics 472-2 Legal
Transparency:
3M CG 3300
Labels:
Avery laser label # 5160
■ Before you buy a large amount of paper, please test some to
make sure that the paper is suitable.
■ Use paper that is made for plain-paper copying.
■ Use paper that is 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb).
■ Use neutral paper. Do not use acidic or alkaline paper.
■ Use long-grain paper.
■ Use paper with a moisture content of approximately 5%.
Caution
Do not use ink jet paper. It may cause a paper jam and damage your
machine.
PAPER 2 - 1
Choosing acceptable paper
We recommend that you test paper (especially special sizes and
types of paper) on the machine before purchasing large quantities.
■ Avoid feeding label sheets that are partly used or your machine
will be damaged.
■ Avoid using coated paper, such as vinyl coated paper.
■ Avoid using preprinted or highly textured paper, or paper with an
embossed letterhead.
For optimum printing, use a recommended type of paper, especially
for plain paper and transparencies. For more information on paper
specifications, call your nearest authorized sales representative or
the place where you purchased your machine.
■ Use label or transparencies that are designed for use in laser
printers.
■ For the best print quality, we recommend using long-grained
paper.
■ If you are using special paper and the paper has problems
feeding from the paper tray, try again using the multi-purpose
tray.
■ You can use recycled paper in this machine.
2 - 2 PAPER
Paper capacity of the paper trays
Paper size
Number of sheets
Multi-purpose tray
(MP tray)
Width: 69.8 to 220 mm
(2.75 to 8.66 in.)
Height: 116 to 406.4 mm
(4.57 to 16.0 in.)
50 sheets
(80 g/m2 or 20 lb)
Paper tray
(Upper Tray)
A4, Letter, Legal, B5 (ISO), B5
(JIS), Executive, A5, A6, B6
(ISO)
250 sheets
(80 g/m2 or 20 lb)
Optional lower tray
A4, Letter, Legal, B5 (ISO), B5
(JIS), Executive, A5, B6 (ISO)
250 sheets
(80 g/m2 or 20 lb)
Duplex printing
A4, Letter, Legal
—
PAPER 2 - 3
Paper specifications for each paper tray
Paper
types
Paper
weights
Paper
sizes
Multipurpose
tray
Plain paper, Bond paper, Recycled paper, Envelope *1,
Labels*2 , and Transparency*2
Paper tray
Plain paper, Recycled paper, and Transparency *2
Optional
Lower tray
Plain paper, Recycled paper, and Transparency *2
Multipurpose
tray
60 to 161 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb)
Paper tray
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb)
Optional
Lower tray
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb)
Multipurpose
tray
Width: 69.8 to 220 mm
(2.75 to 8.66 in.)
Height: 116 to 406.4 mm
(4.57 to 16.0 in.)
Paper tray
A4, Letter, Legal, B5 (ISO), B5 (JIS), Executive, A5, A6,
B6 (ISO)
Optional
Lower Tray
A4, Letter, Legal, B5 (ISO), B5 (JIS), Executive, A5, B6
(ISO)
*1 Up to 3 envelopes
*2 Up to 10 sheets
When printing transparencies, remove each one from the
face-down output tray after it exits the machine.
2 - 4 PAPER
How to load paper
To load paper or other media in the paper tray
1
Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
2
While pressing the paper guide release lever, slide the adjusters
to fit the paper size.
Check that the guides are firmly in the slots.
For Legal size paper, press the universal guide release button
and pull out the back of the paper tray.
Universal Guide Release
Button
PAPER 2 - 5
3
4
Fan the stack of paper well to avoid paper jams and misfeeds.
Put paper in the paper tray.
Check that the paper is flat in the tray, below the maximum
paper mark, and that the paper guide is flush against the paper
stack.
Up to here.
5
Put the paper tray firmly back in the machine and unfold the
support flap before you use the machine.
Support Flap with
Extension
When you put paper in the paper tray, please remember the
following:
■ The side to be printed on must be face down.
■ Put the leading edge (top of the paper) in first and push it
gently into the tray.
■ To copy or receive faxes on Legal size paper, unfold the
support flap extension, too.
2 - 6 PAPER
To load paper or other media in the multi-purpose tray
(MP tray)
When printing envelopes and labels you should only use the
multi-purpose tray.
1
Open the MP tray and lower it gently.
2
Pull out and unfold the MP tray support flap.
MP tray support flap
3
When loading paper in the MP tray, make sure it touches the
back of the tray.
Make sure that the paper is straight and in the proper position
on the MP tray. If it is not, the paper may not be fed properly,
resulting in a skewed printout or a paper jam.
PAPER 2 - 7
You can place up to 3 envelopes or up to 50 sheets of 80 g/m2
or 20 lb paper in the MP tray.
4
While pressing the paper-guide release lever, slide the paper
guide to fit the paper size.
When you put paper in the MP tray, please remember the
following:
■ The side to be printed on must be face up.
■ During printing, the inside tray rises to feed paper into the
machine.
■ Put the leading edge (top of the paper) in first and push it
gently into the tray.
2 - 8 PAPER
To use Automatic Duplexing for fax, copy and
print operations
If you want to print on both sides of the paper using the Duplex
feature for fax, copy or print, you will need to set the Paper
Adjustment Lever to the size of paper you are using.
This feature is available for A4, Letter or Legal size paper. (See
Setting Duplex printing for Fax mode on page 5-10, Duplex/N in 1 on
page 10-11 and Two-sided printing (Duplex Printing) on page 11-3.)
1
2
Load paper in the Paper Tray or Multi-purpose Tray.
Set the Paper Adjustment Lever for Duplex Printing, in the back
of the machine, to match your paper size.
Letter/Legal
A4
3
Your machine is now ready to print two-sided pages.
PAPER 2 - 9
3
On-screen programming
User-friendly programming
Your machine is designed to be easy to use with LCD on-screen
programming using the navigation keys. User-friendly programming
helps you take full advantage of all the menu selections your
machine has to offer.
Since your programming is done on the LCD, we have created
step-by-step on-screen instructions to help you program your
machine. All you need to do is follow the instructions as they guide
you through the menu selections and programming options.
Menu table
You can probably program your machine without the User’s Guide.
But to help you understand the menu selections and options that are
found in the machine programs, use the Menu table on page 3-4.
You can program your machine by pressing Menu followed by
the menu numbers.
For example to set Resolution to Fine:
Press Menu, 2, 2, 2 and
or
to select Fine.
Press Enter .
Memory Storage
If there is a power failure, you will not lose your menu settings
because they are stored permanently. Temporary settings (such as
Contrast, Overseas Mode, and so on) will be lost. You may also have
to reset the date and time.
ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING 3 - 1
Navigation keys
* Access the menu
* Go to the next menu level
* Accept an option
* Exit the menu by pressing
repeatedly
* Go back to the previous
menu level
* Scroll through the current
menu level
* Go back to the previous
menu level
* Go forward to the next
menu level
* Exit the menu
You can access the menu mode by pressing Menu.
When you enter the menu, the LCD scrolls.
Press 1 for System Setup menu
1.System Setup
2.Fax
—OR—
3.Copy
Press 2 for Fax menu
4.Printer
—OR—
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Press 3 for Copy menu
—OR—
Press 4 for Printer menu
4.Printer
5.Print Reports
—OR—
6.LAN
Press 5 for Print Reports menu
0.Initial Setup
—OR—
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Press 6 for LAN menu
(If the optional Network board is installed.)
—OR—
Press 0 for Initial Setup menu
—OR—
You can scroll more quickly through each menu level by pressing the
arrow for the direction you want:
or
.
3 - 2 ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING
Then set an option by pressing Enter when that option appears on
the LCD.
The LCD will then show the next menu level.
Press
or
to scroll to your next menu selection.
Press Enter.
When you finish setting an option, the LCD shows Accepted.
Use
to scroll backward if you passed your choices or want
to save keystrokes.
The current setting is always the option with “ ”.
ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING 3 - 3
Main Menu
Submenu
Menu
Selections
Options
Descriptions
1.System
Setup
1.Mode Timer
—
0 Sec
30 Secs
1 Min
2 Mins
5 Mins
Off
Sets how long the
machine will stay in
Copy or Scan mode
before returning to
Fax mode.
4-5
2.Paper Type
1.MP Tray
Thin
Plain
Thick
Thicker
Transparency
Sets the type of
paper in the
Multi-purpose tray.
4-5
2.Upper Tray
Thin
Plain
Thick
Thicker
Transparency
Sets the type of
paper in upper tray.
4-5
3.Lower Tray
(option)
Thin
Plain
Thick
Thicker
Transparency
Sets the type of
paper in lower tray.
4-5
1.Upper Tray
(This menu only
appears if you
have the
optional lower
tray)
A4
Letter
Legal
Executive
A5
A6
B5
B6
Sets the size of paper
in upper tray.
4-6
2.Lower Tray
(option)
A4
Letter
Legal
Executive
A5
B5
B6
Sets the size of paper
in lower tray.
4-6
3.Paper Size
Page
The factory settings are shown in Bold
with .
3 - 4 ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING
Main Menu
Submenu
1.System Setup 4.Volume
(Continued)
5.Ecology
Menu
Selections
Options
Descriptions
1.Ring
Low
Med
High
Off
Adjusts the ring
volume.
4-7
2.Beep Vol.
Low
Med
High
Off
Adjusts the volume
level of the beeper.
4-7
3.Speaker
Low
Med
High
Off
Adjusts the speaker
volume.
4-8
1.Save Toner
On
Off
Increases the life of
the toner cartridge.
4-8
Conserves power.
4-9
Selects the tray that
will be used for Copy
mode.
4-10
—
Selects the tray that
will be used for Fax
mode.
4-11
—
Selects the tray that
will be used for
Report/List.
4-11
Adjusts the contrast of
the LCD.
4-12
2.Sleep Timer
6. Tray
Use:Copy
—
(If you have the
optional lower tray,
see page 3-14.)
7. Tray
Use:Fax
Upper Tray
MP Only
Auto
(This setting only
appears if you have
the optional lower
tray, see page
3-14.)
8. Tray
Use:Rprt
(If you have the
optional lower tray,
see page 3-14.)
7.LCD
Contrast
9.LCD
Contrast
(With optional lower
tray.)
Page
—
-
+
+
+
+
+
The factory settings are shown in Bold
with .
ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING 3 - 5
Main Menu
Submenu
2.Fax
1.RX Settings
(In Fax mode
only)
Menu
Selections
1.Ring Count
2.F/T Ring
Time
3.Ext.
Tel. RX
Descriptions
00
01
02
03
04
20
30
40
70
On
Off
Sets the number of
rings before the
machine answers in
FAX or FAX/TEL
mode.
5-2
Sets the
pseudo/double-ring
time in FAX/TEL
mode.
5-3
Receives fax
messages without
pressing the Start
key.
You can answer all
calls at an extension
or external phone
and use codes to turn
the machine on or off.
You can personalize
these codes.
Reduces the size of
incoming faxes.
5-4
Makes printouts
darker or lighter.
5-6
Sets up your
machine to poll
another fax machine.
Prints received faxes
on both sides of the
paper.
Changes the
lightness or darkness
of faxes you send.
5-9
4.Remote
Code
On
( 51, #51)
Off
5.Auto
Reduction
On
Off
On
Off
6.Print
Density
7.Poll RX
2.TX Settings
(In Fax mode
only)
Options
8.Duplex
On
Off
1.Contrast
Auto
Light
Dark
Standard
Fine
EX-Fine
Photo
2.Resolution
+
+
+
+
+
Sets the default
resolution for
outgoing faxes.
Page
5-8
5-5
5-10
6-6
6-7
The factory settings are shown in Bold
with .
3 - 6 ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING
Main Menu
Submenu
Menu
Selections
Options
Descriptions
2.Fax
(Continued)
2.TX Settings
(Continued)
(In Fax mode
only)
3.Delayed
Send
—
Set the time of day in
24 hour format that
the delayed faxes will
be sent.
6-19
4.Batch TX
On
Off
Combines delayed
faxes to the same fax
number at the same
time of day into one
transmission.
6-20
5.TX from
ADF
Next Fax Only
On
Off
You can send a fax
without using the
memory.
6-10
6.Poll
On
Off
Sets up the original
on your machine to
be retrieved by
another fax machine.
6-21
7.Cover
Sheet
Next Fax Only
On
Off
Print Sample
Automatically sends
a Cover Sheet you
have programmed.
6-12
8.Cover
Message
—
You can set up your
own comments for
fax Cover Sheet.
6-13
9.Overseas
Mode
On
Off
Adjusts for overseas
transmissions, which
can sometimes
cause problems.
6-18
0.Glass Fax
Size
A4/Letter
Legal
Adjusts the scan
area of the scanner
glass to the size of
the original.
6-4
Stores One-Touch
Dial numbers, so you
can dial by pressing
one key (and Start).
7-1
Stores Speed Dial
numbers, so you can
dial by pressing only
a few keys (and
Start).
7-2
3.Dialer
Setting
1.One-Touch
2.Speed Dial
—
Page
The factory settings are shown in Bold
with .
ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING 3 - 7
Main Menu
Submenu
Menu
Selections
Options
Descriptions
2.Fax
(Continued)
3.Dialer
Setting
(continued)
3.Setup
Groups
—
Sets up a Group
number for
Broadcasting.
7-4
4.Setup
Reports
1.Job Status
Rpt
Incomplete
Inc+Image
All
All+Image
Initial setup for Job
Status Report and
Journal.
9-1
2.Journal
Every 50 Faxes
Every 6 Hours
Every 12 Hours
Every 24 Hours
Every 2 Days
Every 7 Days
Off
1.RMT RTV/FX
FWD
Off
Remote Retrieve
Fax Forward
Storing incoming
faxes in memory for
remote retrieval
-ORSets the machine to
forward fax
messages.
8-1
2.Print Fax
—
Prints incoming faxes
stored in the
memory.
5-5
—
—
Checks which jobs
are in the memory or
cancels a delayed
fax or polling job.
6-11
5.Remote Fax
Opt
6.View/Del.
Jobs
Page
9-2
The factory settings are shown in Bold
with .
3 - 8 ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING
Main Menu
Submenu
Menu
Selections
Options
Descriptions
2.Fax
(Continued)
0.Miscellaneous
1.Mem
Security
—
Prohibits most
functions except
receiving faxes into
memory.
6-23
2.Page
Counter
Total
Copy
Print
List/Fax
Let you check
number of total
pages the machine
has printed so far.
22-36
3.Unique Ring
Off
Set (On)
Uses the Telephone
Company’s
Distinctive Ring
subscriber service to
register the ring
pattern with the
machine.
5-13
4.Caller ID
Display #
Print Report
View or print a list of
the last 30 Caller IDs
stored in the
memory.
5-15
Auto
Text
Photo
Selects the Copy
resolution for your
type of original.
10-16
Adjusts the contrast
for copies.
10-16
3.Copy
4.Printer
1.Copy Mode
2.Contrast
—
1.Emulation
—
Auto
HP LaserJet
BR-Script 3
Selects the
Emulation mode.
11-12
2.Print
Options
1.Internal
Font
—
11-13
2.Configuration
—
Prints a list of the
machine’s internal
fonts or current
printer settings.
—
—
Returns the machine
to the original factory
default settings.
11-13
3.Reset
Printer
-
+
+
+
+
+
Page
11-13
The factory settings are shown in Bold
with .
ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING 3 - 9
Main Menu
Submenu
Menu
Selections
Options
Descriptions
5.Print
Reports
1.Help List
—
—
2.Dialer Dir
—
—
You can print these
lists and reports.
3.Journal
—
—
4.Job Status
Rpt
—
—
5.Mach.
Settings
—
—
6.Order
Form
—
—
You can print a
supplies order form
that you can Fax to
request new
supplies.
1.Answer
Mode
—
Fax Only
Fax/Tel
External TAM
Manual
You can choose the
receive mode that
best suits your
needs.
5-2
2.Date/Time
—
—
Puts the date and
time on the LCD and
in headings of faxes
you send.
4-1
3.Machine ID
—
Fax
Tel
Name
Program your name,
fax and telephone
number to appear on
each page you fax.
4-2
4-3
4.Tone/Pulse
—
Tone
Pulse
Selects the dialing
mode.
4-4
5.Language
—
English
French
Allows you to change
the LCD Language
for your country.
0.Initial
Setup
Page
9-3
See
Quick
Setup
Guide
The factory settings are shown in Bold
with .
3 - 10 ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING
If you installed optional LAN board, the LCD shows the following
LAN menu.
Main Menu
Submenu
Menu
Selections
Options
Descriptions
6.LAN
(option)
1.Setup
TCP/IP
1.BOOT Method
Auto
Static
RARP
BOOTP
DHCP
You can choose the
BOOT method that
best suits your
needs.
2.IP Address
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
Enter the IP address.
3.Subnet Mask
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
Enter the Subnet
mask.
4.Gateway
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
Enter the Gateway
address.
5.Host Name
BRN_XXXXXX
Enter the Host name.
6.WINS Config
Auto
Static
You can choose the
WINS configuration
mode.
7.WINS
Server
Primary
Secondary
Specifies the IP
address of the
primary or secondary
server.
8.DNS Server
Primary
Secondary
Specifies the IP
address of the
primary or secondary
server.
9.APIPA
On
Off
Automatically
allocates the IP
address from the
link-local address
range.
Page
See
Network
User’s
Guide
on the
CD-ROM.
The factory settings are shown in Bold
with .
ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING 3 - 11
Main Menu
Submenu
Menu
Selections
Options
Descriptions
6.LAN
(option)
2.Setup
Internet
1.Mail
Address
(60
characters)
Enter the mail
address.
2.SMTP Server
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
Enter the SMTP
server address.
3.POP3 Server
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
Enter the POP3
server address.
4.Mailbox
Name
(up to 20
characters)
Enter the mail box
name.
5.Mailbox Pwd
Password:**
****
Enter the password
to login to the POP3
server.
1.Auto
Polling
On
Off
Automatically checks
the POP3 server for
new messages.
2.Poll
Frequency
10Min
Sets the interval for
checking for new
messages on the
POP3 server.
3.Header
Subject+From
+To
None
All
Selects the contents
of the mail header to
be printed.
4.Del Error
Mail
On
Off
Deletes error mails
automatically.
5.Notification
MDN
Off
On
Sends notification
messages.
1.Sender
Subject
—
Displays the subject
that is attached to the
Internet Fax data.
2.Size Limit
On
Off
Limits the size of
E-mail documents.
3.Notification
On
Off
Sends notification
messages.
3.Setup Mail
RX
4.Setup Mail
TX
Page
See
Network
User’s
Guide
on the
CD-ROM.
The factory settings are shown in Bold
with .
3 - 12 ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING
Main Menu
Submenu
Menu
Selections
Options
Descriptions
6.LAN
(option)
(Continued)
5.Setup Relay
1.Rly
Broadcast
On
Off
Relays a document
to another fax
machine.
2.Relay
Domain
RelayXX:
Registers the
Domain name.
3.Relay
Report
On
Off
Prints the Relay
Broadcast Report.
1.Netware
On
Off
Select On to use the
machine on a
Netware network.
2.Net Frame
Auto
8023
ENET
8022
SNAP
Lets you specify the
frame type.
3.AppleTalk
On
Off
Select On to use the
machine on a
Macintosh network.
4.DLC/LLC
On
Off
Select On to use the
machine on a
DLC/LLC network.
5.Net BIOS
/IP
On
Off
Select On to use the
machine on a Net
BIOS/IP network.
6.Ethernet
Auto
100B-FD
100B-HD
10B-FD
10B-HD
Selects Ethernet link
mode.
7.Time Zone
GMT-XX:XX
Sets the time zone
for your country.
7.Scan to
Email
—
PDF
JPEG
Selects the file type.
8.Fax Server
TX
—
On
Off
You can store
prefix/suffix address
in the machine and
can send e-mail for a
faxserver service
system
automatically.
6.Setup Misc.
Page
See
Network
User’s
Guide
on the
CD-ROM.
The factory settings are shown in Bold
with .
ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING 3 - 13
If you have the optional paper tray, the LCD displays these
options. (Menu , 1, 6/Menu, 1, 7/Menu, 1, 8)
Main Menu
Submenu
Menu
Selections
Options
Descriptions
Page
1.System
Setup
6.Tray
Use:Copy
—
Upper Tray
Lower Tray
MP Only
Auto
Select the tray that
will be used for
copying.
4-10
7.Tray
Use:Fax
—
Upper Tray
Lower Tray
Auto
Auto
Separation
Select the tray that
will be used for
faxing.
4-11
8.Tray
Use:Rprt
—
Upper Tray
Lower Tray
Auto
Select the tray that
will be used for
printing reports.
4-11
The factory settings are shown in Bold
with .
3 - 14 ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING
4
Getting started
Initial Setup
Setting the Date and Time
Your machine displays the date and time and if you set up the Machine ID
it prints on every fax you send. If there is a power failure, you may have
to reset the date and time. All other settings will not be affected.
1 Press Menu, 0, 2.
02.Date/Time
2 Enter the last two digits of the year.
Press Enter .
Year:20XX
Set & Enter
3 Enter two digits for the month.
Press Enter .
(For example, enter 09 for September, or 10 for October.)
4 Enter two digits for the day.
Press Enter .
(For example, enter 06 for 6th.)
5 Enter the time in 24-Hour format.
Press Enter .
(For example, enter 15:25 for 3:25 P.M.)
6 Press Stop . The LCD now shows the date and time whenever
the machine is in Standby mode.
GETTING STARTED 4 - 1
Setting the Machine ID
You should store your name or company name and fax number and
telephone number to be printed on all fax pages that you send.
1 Press Menu, 0, 3.
03.Machine ID
2 Enter your fax number (up to 20
digits).
Fax:
Press Enter.
Set & Enter
3 Enter your telephone number (up
to 20 digits).
Press Enter.
(If your telephone number and fax number are the same, enter
the same number again).
The telephone number you enter is only used for Cover Sheet
features.(See Composing the electronic Cover Sheet on page
6-12.)
You can not enter a hyphen.
4
5
Use the dial pad to enter your name
(up to 20 characters).
Press Enter.
(See Entering text on page 4-3.)
Press Stop.
The LCD will show the date and time.
If the Machine ID has already been programmed, the LCD will
ask you to press 1 to make a change or 2 to exit without
changing.
4 - 2 GETTING STARTED
Entering text
When you are setting certain functions, such as the Machine ID, you
may need to type text into the machine. Most number keys have
three or four letters printed above them. The keys for 0, # and
do
not have printed letters because they are used for special
characters.
By pressing the appropriate number key repeatedly, you can access
the character you want.
Press Key
one time
two times
three times
four times
2
A
B
C
2
3
D
E
F
3
4
G
H
I
4
5
J
K
L
5
6
M
N
O
6
7
P
Q
R
S
8
T
U
V
8
9
W
X
Y
Z
Inserting spaces
To enter a space, press
between characters.
once between numbers and twice
Making corrections
If you entered a letter incorrectly and want to change it, press
to
move the cursor under the incorrect character. Then press
Clear/Back. The letter above the cursor will be deleted. Re-enter
the correct character.
Repeating letters
If you need to enter a character that is on the same key as the
previous character, press
to move the cursor to the right before
you press the key again.
GETTING STARTED 4 - 3
Special characters and symbols
Press , # or 0, and then press
or
to move the cursor under
the special character or symbol you want. Then press Enter to
select it.
Press
for
(space) ! " # $ % & ’ ( )
Press #
for
:;<=>?@[]^_
Press 0
for
ÉÀÈÊÎÇËÖ0
+,-./
NOTICE (For USA)
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful
for any person to use a computer or electronic device to send any
message via a telephone fax machine unless such messages
clearly contain, in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted
page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it
is sent and an identification of the business or other entity or other
individual sending the message and the telephone number of the
sending machines or such business, other entity or individual.
In order to program this information into your machine, complete
the steps described on page 4-2.
Setting Tone and Pulse dialing mode
1
2
3
Press Menu, 0, 4.
Press
or
to select
Pulse (or Tone).
Press Enter.
Press Stop.
4 - 4 GETTING STARTED
04.Tone/Pulse
▲
▼
Tone
Pulse
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
System Setup
Setting the Mode Timer
The machine has three temporary mode keys on the control panel:
Fax, Copy and Scan. You can change the number of seconds or
minutes the machine takes after the last Copy or Scan operation
before it returns to Fax mode. If you select Off, the machine stays in
the mode you used last.
1
2
3
Press Menu, 1, 1.
Press
or
to select
0 Sec, 30 Secs, 1 Min,
2 Mins, 5 Mins or Off.
Press Enter .
11.Mode Timer
▲
0 Sec
30 Secs
▼
1 Min
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Setting the Paper Type
To get the best print quality, set the machine for the type of paper you
are using.
1 Press Menu, 1, 2, 1 to set the
12.Paper Type
paper type for MP Tray.
1.MP Tray
2.Upper Tray
—OR—
3.Lower Tray
Press Menu, 1, 2, 2 to set the
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
paper type for Upper Tray.
—OR—
If you have the optional paper tray, press Menu, 1, 2, 3 to set
the paper type for Lower Tray.
GETTING STARTED 4 - 5
2
3
4
Press
or
to select Thin,
12.Paper Type
Plain, Thick, Thicker or
1.MP Tray
▲
Plain
Transparency.
▼
Thick
Press Enter.
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Press Stop.
You can select Transparency for Upper Tray and Lower Tray
only when A4, Letter or Legal is selected in Menu, 1, 3.
Setting the Paper Size
You can use eight sizes of paper for printing copies: A4, letter, legal,
executive, A5, A6, B5 and B6 and three sizes of paper for printing
faxes: A4, letter and legal. When you change the size of paper in the
machine, you will need to change the setting for Paper Size at the
same time so your machine can fit an incoming fax or reduced copy
on the page.
1 Press Menu, 1, 3.
13.Paper Size
▲
A4
Press
or
to
select
A4,
2
Letter
Letter, Legal, Executive, A5,
▼
Legal
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
A6, B5 or B6.
Press Enter.
3 Press Stop.
With optional paper tray (LT-5000)
1 Press Menu, 1, 3, 1 to set the
13.Paper Size
paper size for Upper Tray.
1.Upper Tray
—OR—
2.Lower Tray
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Press Menu, 1, 3, 2 to set the
paper size for Lower Tray
or
to select A4, Letter, Legal, Executive,
2 Press
A5, A6, B5 and B6.
Press Enter.
3 Press Stop.
■ If you are using the optional paper tray, paper size A6 is not
available.
■ If you select Transparency in Menu, 1, 2, you can only
select A4, Letter or Legal.
4 - 6 GETTING STARTED
Setting the Ring Volume
You can adjust the ring volume when your machine is idle (not being
used). You can turn the ring Off or you can select the ring volume
level.
1
2
Press Menu, 1, 4, 1.
Press
or
to select
(Low, Med, High or Off).
Press Enter .
3 Press Stop .
—OR—
14.Volume
1.Ring
▲
Med
▼
High
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
In Fax mode, press
or
to adjust the volume level. Every time
you press these keys, the machine will ring so you can hear the
active setting as the LCD shows it. The volume changes with each
key press. The new setting will stay until you change it again.
Setting the Beeper Volume
You can change the beeper volume. The default (factory) setting is
Med. When the beeper is on, the machine beeps every time you
press a key or make a mistake and after a fax is sent or received.
1 Press Menu, 1, 4, 2.
14.Volume
2.Beep Vol.
or
to select your
2 Press
▲
Med
option.
▼
High
(Low, Med, High or Off)
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Press Enter .
3 Press Stop .
GETTING STARTED 4 - 7
Setting the Speaker Volume
You can adjust the machine’s one-way speaker volume.
1 Press Menu, 1, 4, 3.
14.Volume
3.Speaker
Press
or
to
select
2
▲
Med
(Low, Med, High or Off).
▼
High
Press Enter.
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
3 Press Stop.
—OR—
In Fax mode, you can adjust the speaker volume by pressing
Monitor, and then selecting a speaker volume level.
Press or
to adjust the volume level. The LCD shows the setting
you are choosing. Each key press changes the volume to the next
setting. The new setting will remain until you change it again.
Save Toner
You can conserve toner using this feature. When you set Save Toner
to On, print appears somewhat lighter. The default setting is Off.
1 Press Menu, 1, 5, 1.
15.Ecology
1.Save Toner
or
to select On (or
2 Press
▲
On
Off).
▼
Off
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
3 Press Enter.
4 Press Stop.
4 - 8 GETTING STARTED
Sleep Timer
Setting the Sleep Time reduces power consumption by turning off
the fuser inside the machine, while it is idle. You can choose how
long the machine is idle (from 00 to 99 minutes) before it goes into
sleep mode. The timer is automatically reset when the machine
receives a Fax or PC data, or makes a copy. The factory setting is 05
minutes. If you try to print or copy in sleep mode, there will be a short
delay while the fuser warms up to working temperature.
1 Press Menu, 1, 5, 2.
2 Use the dial pad to enter the length of time the machine is idle
before it goes into sleep mode (00 to 99).
3 Press Enter.
4 Press Stop .
■ If you want to turn Sleep mode off, press Secure and Job
Cancel simultaneously in Step 2.
■ If the machine is in Sleep mode when you change the sleep
timer, the new setting will take effect the next time the
machine copies, prints or is restarted.
Turning off the Scanner Lamp
The scanner lamp stays on for 16 hours before automatically
switching off to preserve the life of the lamp. You can turn off the
scanner lamp manually if you wish by pressing the
and
keys
simultaneously. The scanner lamp will remain turned off until the next
time you use the scanning feature.
Turning off the scanner lamp will also reduce the power
consumption.
Please note that turning the lamp off regularly will reduce the
lamp’s life. Some people prefer to turn the lamp off as they leave
the office, or late at night at home. This is not necessary for
normal day to day use.
GETTING STARTED 4 - 9
Setting the Tray Use for Copy mode
The default setting of Auto allows*1 your machine to choose the
optional Lower Tray or the MP tray when paper is out in Upper Tray
or *2 when the size of the original will fit best on the paper in Lower
Tray.
1 Press Menu, 1, 6.
16.Tray Use:Copy
▲
Upper Tray
or
to select
2 Press
MP Only
Upper Tray, MP Only, or Auto.
▼
Auto
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
—OR—
If you have the optional paper tray,
16.Tray Use:Copy
▲
Upper Tray
press
or
to select
Lower Tray
Upper Tray, Lower Tray, MP
▼
MP Only
Only or Auto.
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
3 Press Enter.
4 Press Stop.
*1 Copies will automatically be printed from Lower Tray only if
the Paper Size setting for Lower Tray is the same as Upper
Tray.
*2 When using the ADF, copies will automatically be printed
from Lower Tray if the Paper Size setting for Lower Tray is
different than Upper Tray and this paper size is more
suitable for the scanned original.
4 - 10 GETTING STARTED
Setting the Tray Use for Fax mode
If your machine doesn’t have the optional Lower Tray, you can skip
this setting.
The default setting of Auto allows your machine to choose the
optional Lower Tray if Upper Tray is out of paper or if incoming faxes
will fit best on the paper in Lower Tray.
Auto Separation allows the machine always to print the first page
of the fax document from Upper Tray. All the remaining pages are
printed from the Lower Tray.
1 Press Menu, 1, 7.
17.Tray Use:Fax
▲
Upper Tray
or
to select
2 Press
Lower Tray
Upper Tray, Lower Tray, Auto
▼
Auto
or Auto Separation.
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
3 Press Enter.
4 Press Stop .
If Auto Reduction is turned on, incoming faxes will be printed
from the tray that is set for Auto Reduction. (See Printing a
reduced incoming fax (Auto Reduction) on page 5-5.)
Setting the Tray Use for Printing Reports
If your machine doesn’t have the optional Lower Tray, you can skip
this setting.
The default setting of Auto allows your machine to choose the
optional Lower Tray if Upper Tray is out of paper or if reports will fit
best on the paper in Lower Tray.
1 Press Menu, 1, 8.
18.Tray Use:Rprt
▲
Upper Tray
or
to select
2 Press
Lower Tray
Upper Tray, Lower Tray, or
▼
Auto
Auto.
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
3 Press Enter.
4 Press Stop .
GETTING STARTED 4 - 11
Setting the LCD Contrast
You can change the contrast to help the LCD look lighter or darker.
1 Press Menu, 1, 7.
17.LCD Contrast
—OR—
+
If you have the optional Lower
Set
& Enter
Tray, press Menu, 1, 9.
2 Press to increase the contrast.
—OR—
Press
to decrease the contrast.
Press Enter.
3 Press Stop.
4 - 12 GETTING STARTED
5
RX Settings
Basic receiving operations
Choosing the Answer Mode
There are four different Answer Modes for your machine. You can
choose the mode that best suits your needs.
LCD
How it works
When to use it
Fax Only
(automatic receive)
The machine
automatically answers
every call as a fax.
For dedicated fax lines.
Fax/Tel*
(fax and telephone)
The machine controls the
line and automatically
answers every call. If the
call is a fax it will receive
the fax. If the call is not a
fax it will ring
(pseudo/double ring) for
you to pick up the call.
Use this mode if you expect to receive lots of fax
messages and few telephone calls. You cannot
have an answering machine on the same line, even
if it is on a separate wall jack/phone socket on the
same line. You cannot use the telephone
company’s Voice Mail in this mode.
External TAM
(with an external
answering machine)
The external answering
machine (TAM)
automatically answers
every call.
Voice messages are
stored on the external
TAM. Fax messages are
printed.
Use this mode if you have an external answering
machine on your phone line.
The TAM setting works only with an external
answering machine. Ring Delay and F/T Ring Time
do not work in this setting.
Manual
(manual receive)
You control the phone
line and must answer
every call yourself.
Use this mode when you are using a computer
modem on the same line or if you don’t receive
many fax messages or with Unique Ring.
If you hear fax tones, wait until the machine takes
over the call, then hang up. (See EXT. TEL. RX on
page 5-4.)
(with an external or
extension telephone)
(with an external or
extension telephone or
with Unique Ring)
* In Fax/Tel mode you must set the Ring Count and F/T Ring Time.
If you have extension phones on the line, keep the Ring Count set to
four rings.
The MP tray is not available with Fax Receive.
RX SETTINGS 5 - 1
To select or change your Answer Mode
1 Press Menu, 0, 1.
01.Answer Mode
2
3
Press
or
to select Fax
Only, Fax/Tel, External TAM
or Manual.
Press Enter.
Press Stop.
▲
Fax Only
Fax/Tel
▼
External TAM
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
If you are changing the Answer Mode while in another
operation, the LCD will return to that operation.
03/01/2003 18:15
External TAM
Dial & Start
Fax Only
Fax/Tel
External TAM
Manual
Setting the Ring Count
The Ring Count sets the number of times the machine rings before it
answers in Fax Only or Fax/Tel mode. If you have extension
phones on the same line as the machine or subscribe to the
telephone company’s Unique Ring service, keep the Ring Count
setting of 4. (See EXT. TEL. RX on page 5-4 and Operation from
extension telephones on page 5-7.)
(Fax).
1 If it is not illuminated in green, press
2 Press Menu, 2, 1, 1.
21.RX Settings
1.Ring Count
or
to select how
3 Press
▲
03
many times the line rings before
▼
04
the machine answers (00-04).
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Press Enter.
(If you select 00, the line won’t ring at all.)
4 Press Stop.
5 - 2 RX SETTINGS
Setting the F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only)
If you set the Receive Mode to Fax/Tel, you’ll need to decide how long
the machine will signal you with its special pseudo/double-ring when
you have a voice call. (If it’s a fax call, the machine prints the fax.)
This pseudo/double-ring happens after the initial ringing from the
phone company. Only the machine rings (for 20, 30, 40 or 70 seconds)
and no other phones on the same line will ring with the special
pseudo/double-ring. However, you can still answer the call on any
extension phone (in a separate wall jack/phone socket) on the same
line as the machine. (See Operation from extension telephones on
page 5-7.)
1
2
3
4
If it is not illuminated in green, press
(Fax).
Press Menu, 2, 1, 2.
21.RX Settings
2.F/T Ring Time
Press
or
to select how
▲
20
long the machine will ring to alert
▼
30
you that you have a voice call.
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Press Enter .
Press Stop .
Even if the caller hangs up during the pseudo/double-ringing,
the machine will continue to ring for the set time.
RX SETTINGS 5 - 3
EXT. TEL. RX
When you use this feature, you don’t have to press Start or the Fax
Receive Code 51 when you answer a fax call. Selecting On allows
the machine to receive fax calls automatically, even if you lift the
handset of an extension or external phone. When you see
Receiving on the LCD or when you hear ‘chirps’ through the
handset of an extension phone connected to another wall jack/phone
socket, just replace the handset and your machine will do the rest.
Selecting Off means you’ll have to activate the machine yourself by
lifting the handset of an external or extension phone, and then press
Start on the machine
—OR—by pressing 51 if you are not at your machine. (See
Operation from extension telephones on page 5-7.)
If this feature is set to On, but your machine doesn’t connect a
fax call when you lift a extension or external phone handset,
press the Fax Receive Code 51.
If you send faxes from a computer on the same phone line and
the machine intercepts them, set EXT. TEL. RX to Off.
1
2
3
4
If it is not illuminated in green, press
(Fax).
Press Menu, 2, 1, 3.
21.RX Settings
3.Ext. Tel. RX
Use
or
to select On (or
▲
On
Off).
▼
Off
Press Enter.
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Press Stop.
5 - 4 RX SETTINGS
Printing a reduced incoming fax
(Auto Reduction)
If you choose On, the machine automatically reduces an incoming
fax to fit on one page of letter, legal or A4 size paper, regardless of
the paper size of the original. The machine calculates the reduction
ratio by using the page size of the original and your Paper Size
setting (Menu, 1, 3).
1
2
3
4
5
If it is not illuminated in green, press
(Fax).
Press Menu, 2, 1, 5.
21.RX Settings
5.Auto Reduction
If you have the optional paper
▲
On
lower tray, press
or
to
▼
Off
select Upper Tray or Lower
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Tray.
Press Enter .
Use
or
to select On (or Off).
Press Enter .
Press Stop .
If you receive faxes that are split onto two pages, turn on this
setting.
Printing a fax from the memory
If you use Remote Rtrv or Fax Forward features, you can still print a
fax from the memory when you are at your machine.
1 Press Menu, 2, 5, 2.
25.Remote Fax Opt
2.Print Fax
2 Press Start .
3 After printing has finished,
Press Start
press Stop.
RX SETTINGS 5 - 5
Setting the Print Density
You can adjust print density, making your printed pages darker or
lighter.
(Fax).
1 If it is not illuminated in green, press
2 Press Menu, 2, 1, 6.
21.RX Settings
6.Print Density
3 Press to make the print darker.
—OR—
+
Set
& Enter
Press
to make the print lighter.
Press Enter.
4 Press Stop.
5 - 6 RX SETTINGS
Advanced receiving operations
Operation from extension telephones
If you answer a fax call on an extension telephone, or an external
telephone in the EXT. jack, you can make your machine take the call
by using the Fax Receive Code. When you press the Fax Receive
Code 51, the machine starts to receive a fax.
(See EXT. TEL. RX on page 5-4.)
If the machine answers a voice call and pseudo/double-rings for you
to take over, use the Telephone Answer Code #51 to take the call at
an extension phone. (See Setting the F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode
only) on page 5-3.)
If you answer a call and no one is on the line, you should assume that
you’re receiving a manual fax.
■ At an extension phone (on a separate telephone wall jack/phone
socket), press 51, wait for fax-receiving tones (chirps), and
then hang up.
■ At an external phone (connected to the machine’s EXT jack),
press 51 and wait for the phone to be disconnected before you
hang up (the LCD shows Receiving).
Your caller will have to press Start to send the fax.
For FAX/TEL mode only
When the machine is in FAX/TEL mode, it will use the F/T Ring Time
(pseudo/double-ringing) to alert you to pick up a voice call.
Lift the external telephone's handset, and then press Monitor to
answer.
If you’re at an extension phone, you’ll need to lift the handset during
the F/T Ring Time and then press #51 between the double rings. If
no one is on the line, or if someone wants to send you a fax, send the
call back to the machine by pressing 51.
RX SETTINGS 5 - 7
Using a cordless external handset
If your cordless telephone is connected to the EXT. jack of the
machine and you typically carry the cordless handset elsewhere, it is
easier to answer calls during the Ring Count. If you let the machine
answer first, you will have to go to the machine so you can press
Monitor to transfer the call to the cordless handset.
Changing the remote codes
Remote Codes might not work with some telephone systems. The
preset Fax Receive Code is 51. The preset Telephone Answer
Code is # 51.
If you are always disconnected when accessing your external
TAM remotely, try changing the Fax Receive Code and
Telephone Answer Code to another three-digit code (such as
### and 999).
1
2
3
4
5
6
If it is not illuminated in green, press
(Fax).
Press Menu, 2, 1, 4.
21.RX Settings
4.Remote Code
Press
or
to select On (or
▲
On
Off).
▼
Off
Press Enter.
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
If you want to, enter a new Fax
Receive Code.
Press Enter.
If you want to, enter a new Telephone Answer Code.
Press Enter.
Press Stop.
5 - 8 RX SETTINGS
Polling
Polling is the process of retrieving faxes from another fax machine.
You can use your machine to ‘poll’ other machines, or you can have
someone poll your machine.
Everyone who is involved in Polling needs to set up their fax
machines for Polling. When someone polls your machine to receive
a fax, they pay for the call. If you poll someone’s fax machine to
receive a fax, you pay for the call.
Some fax machines do not respond to the Polling feature.
Setting up Polling Receive
Polling Receive is when you call another fax machine to receive a fax
from it.
(Fax).
1 If it is not illuminated in green, press
2 Press Menu, 2, 1, 7.
21.RX Settings
7.Poll RX
Press
or
to
select
(or
On
3
▲
On
Off).
▼
Off
Press Enter .
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
4 Enter the fax number you are
polling.
5 Press Start .
The LCD shows Dialing.
RX SETTINGS 5 - 9
Setting up Sequential Polling Receive
Your machine can ask for faxes from several fax units in a single
operation (Sequential Polling Receive). Afterwards, a Sequential
Polling Report will be printed.
(Fax).
1 If it is not illuminated in green, press
2 Press Menu, 2, 1, 7.
21.RX Settings
7.Poll RX
or
to select On (or
3 Press
▲
On
Off).
▼
Off
Press Enter.
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
4 Enter the fax machines you want
to poll using One-Touch, Speed Dial, a Group or the dial pad.
You must press Enter between each fax number.
5 Press Start. Your machine will poll each number or Group
number in turn to receive a fax.
Setting Duplex printing for Fax mode
If you set Duplex to On for fax receive, the machine prints received
faxes on both sides of the paper.
You can use three sizes of paper for this function - letter, legal and
A4.
(Fax).
1 If it is not illuminated in green, press
2 Press Menu, 2, 1, 8.
21.RX Settings
8.Duplex
or
to select On (or
3 Press
▲
On
Off).
▼
Off
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Press Enter.
4 Press Stop.
While the Duplex printing for fax is working, auto reduction is
also On temporarily.
5 - 10 RX SETTINGS
Telephone services
Your machine supports the Unique Ring telephone service that some
telephone companies offer.
If you have Voice Mail, RingMaster, an answering service, an
alarm system or other custom features on your telephone line, it
may affect the way your machine works. (See Custom features
on page 1-12.)
If you have Voice Mail on your phone line, please read the
following carefully.
Unique Ring
The term “Unique Ring” is used to identify a phone company service
that is given many names, depending on the telephone company you
are using. For example, this service may be called SmartRing,
RingMaster, Teen-Ring, Indent-a-Call or Indent-a-Ring.
What does your telephone company’s ‘Unique Ring’ do?
Your telephone company’s Unique Ring service allows you to have
more than one number on the same phone line. If you need more
than one phone number, it is cheaper than paying for an extra
line. Each phone number has its own unique ring pattern, so you will
know which phone number is ringing. This is one way you can have
a separate phone number for your machine.
Please call your telephone company for availability and rates.
What does ix2700’s ‘Unique Ring’ do?
The ix2700 has a Unique Ring feature that allows you to use your
machine to take full advantage of the telephone company’s Unique
Ring service. The new phone number on your line can just receive
faxes.
You must pay for your telephone company’s Unique Ring
service before you program the machine to work with it.
RX SETTINGS 5 - 11
Do you have Voice Mail?
If you have Voice Mail on the phone line that you will install your new
machine on, there is a strong possibility that Voice Mail and the
machine will conflict with each other while receiving incoming calls.
However, the Unique Ring feature allows you to use more than
one number on your line, so both Voice Mail and the machine
can work together without any problems. If each one has a
separate phone number, neither will interfere with the other’s
operations.
If you decide to get the Unique Ring service from the telephone
company, you will need to follow the directions below to ‘register’ the
new Unique Ring pattern they give you. This is so your machine can
recognize its incoming calls.
You can change or cancel the Unique Ring pattern at any time.
You can switch it off temporarily, and turn it back on later. When
you get a new fax number, make sure you reset this feature.
Before you choose the ring pattern to register
You can only register one Unique Ring pattern with the machine.
Some ring patterns cannot be registered. The ring patterns below are
supported by your machine. Register the one your telephone
company gives you.
Ring
Pattern
Rings
1
long-long
2
short-long-short
3
short-short-long
4
very long (normal pattern)
If the ring pattern you received is not on this chart, please call
your telephone company and ask for one that is shown.
5 - 12 RX SETTINGS
■ The machine will only answer calls to its registered number.
■ The first two rings are silent on the machine. This is because the
fax must «listen» to the ring pattern (to compare it to the pattern
that was ‘registered’). (Other telephones on the same line will
ring.)
■ If you program the machine properly, it will recognize the
registered ring pattern of the ‘fax number’ within 2 ring patterns
and then answer with a fax tone. When the ‘voice number’ is
called, the machine will not answer.
Registering the Unique Ring pattern
Very important!
After you have set the Unique Ring feature to ON, the answer mode
is set to Manual automatically. Unless you have a TAM or Voice Mail
set up on the Unique Ring number, Manual mode means you must
answer all the calls yourself. You can not change the answer mode
to the other mode while the Unique Ring is set to on.
1 Press Menu, 2, 0, 3.
20.Miscellaneous
3.Unique Ring
or
to select Set.
2 Press
▲
Off
Press Enter .
▼
Set
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
or
to select the
3 Press
stored ring pattern you want to use.
Press Enter .
(You will hear each pattern as you scroll through the four
patterns. Make sure you choose the pattern that the telephone
company gave you.)
4 Press Stop .
Unique Ring is now set to on.
Turning off the Unique Ring
1 Press Menu, 2, 0, 3.
2
3
Press
or
Press Enter .
Press Stop .
to select Off.
20.Miscellaneous
3.Unique Ring
▲
On
▼
Off
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
If you turn off Unique Ring, the machine will stay in Manual
answer mode. You will need to set the Answer Mode again.
(See To select or change your Answer Mode on page 5-2.)
RX SETTINGS 5 - 13
Caller ID
The Caller ID feature lets you use the Caller ID subscriber
service offered by many local telephone companies. This
service provides you, by means of the LCD, the name or
telephone number of your caller as the line rings.
After a few rings, the LCD shows the telephone number of your caller
(or name, if available). Once you pick up the handset, the Caller ID
information disappears from the LCD, but the call information
remains stored in the Caller ID memory.
■ You will see the first 16 characters of the number (or name).
■ Out of Area display means call originated outside your Caller
ID service area.
■ Private Call display means the caller has intentionally
blocked transmission of information.
If both the name and number are received, the LCD shows only the
name. You can print a list of Caller ID information received by your
machine. (See Printing Caller ID List on page 5-15.)
Caller ID service varies with different carriers. Call your local
telephone company to determine the kind of service available in your
area.
5 - 14 RX SETTINGS
Viewing Caller ID List
Caller ID memory stores information for up to thirty calls. When the
thirty-first call comes in, information about the first call is erased. You
can scroll through Caller ID information to review those calls made to
your machine.
1 Press Menu, 2, 0, 4.
20.Miscellaneous
4.Caller ID
or
to select
2 Press
▲
Display#
Display#.
▼
Print Report
Press Enter .
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
or
to scroll
3 Press
through the Caller ID memory to select the Caller ID you want to
view, and then press Enter. The LCD shows the caller’s
number and the date and time of the call.
or
to return to the Caller ID listing.
4 Press
—OR—
Press Stop .
Clearing a Caller ID stored in the memory
For effective use of the memory, we recommend that you clear the
Caller IDs stored in memory by pressing Clear/Back when the LCD
shows each caller ID number or name.
Printing Caller ID List
1
2
3
4
Press Menu, 2, 0, 4.
Press
or
to select
Print Report.
Press Enter .
Press Start .
After printing has finished,
press Stop.
20.Miscellaneous
4.Caller ID
▲
Display#
▼
Print Report
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
RX SETTINGS 5 - 15
6
TX Settings
How to Fax
You can send faxes from the ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) or
from the scanner glass.
Enter Fax mode
Before sending faxes, make sure
green. If not, press
(Fax) is illuminated in
(Fax) to enter Fax mode. The default
setting is Fax.
Faxing from the automatic document feeder (ADF)
The ADF can hold up to 50 pages and feeds each sheet individually.
Use standard (20 lb or 75 g/m2) paper and always fan the pages
before putting them in the ADF.
DO NOT use paper that is curled, wrinkled, folded, ripped,
stapled, paper clipped, pasted or taped.
DO NOT use cardboard, newspaper or fabric. (To fax this kind
of original, see Faxing from the scanner glass on page 6-3.)
■ Make sure originals written with ink are completely dry.
■ The originals to be faxed must be from 5.8 to 8.5 inches wide and
5.8 to 14 inches long.
TX SETTINGS 6 - 1
Faxing from the ADF
1
If it is not illuminated in
green, press
2
3
4
ADF Document
Support Extension
ADF
Document
Output
Support
Flap
(Fax). Pull out the ADF
Document Support
Extension.
Unfold the ADF
Document Output
Support Flap.
Fan the pages well and
stagger them at an angle. Make sure you put the originals face
up, top edge first in the ADF until you feel them touch the feed
roller.
Adjust the paper guides to fit the width of your originals.
The originals are
Face Up
in the ADF
Document Support
5
Dial the fax number.
Press Start. The machine starts scanning the first page.
6 - 2 TX SETTINGS
Faxing from the scanner glass
You can use the scanner glass to fax pages of a book or one page
at a time. The originals can be up to letter, A4 or legal size (8.5 inches
to 14 inches). To cancel, press Stop.
1
If it is not illuminated in green, press
(Fax). Lift the document cover.
The originals are
Face Down on the
Scanner Glass
Document
Guidelines
2
3
Using the document guidelines on the left, center the original
face down on the scanner glass.
Close the document cover.
If the original is a book or is thick, do not slam the cover or press
on it.
4
5
6
Dial the fax number.
Press Start .
The machine starts scanning the first page.
To send a single page, press 2 (or Flatbed Fax:
Next Page?
press Start again). The machine
▼ 1.Yes
starts sending the original.
▲ 2.No(Send)
—OR—
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
To send more than one page, press 1 and go to Step 6.
Place the next page on the
Flatbed Fax:
scanner glass.
Set Next Page
Press Enter .
Then Press Enter
The machine starts scanning.
(Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for each
additional page.)
■ If the memory is full and you are faxing a single page, it will
be sent in real time.
■ If you need to cancel before the fax is sent, press Stop.
TX SETTINGS 6 - 3
Faxing legal size originals from the scanner glass
When originals are legal size, you need to set the Glass Fax Size to
Legal. If you do not, the bottom portion of the faxes will be missing.
1
2
3
4
If it is not illuminated in green, press
Press Menu, 2, 2, 0.
Press
or
to select Legal.
Press Enter.
Press Stop.
(Fax).
Out of Memory message
If you get an Out of Memory message while scanning the first page
of a fax, press Stop to cancel the scan. If you get an Out of
Memory message while scanning a subsequent page, you will have
the option to press Start to send the pages scanned so far, or to
press Stop to cancel the operation.
Manual transmission
Manual transmission lets you hear the dialing, ringing and
fax-receiving tones while sending a fax.
1
2
3
4
5
6
If it is not illuminated in green, press
(Fax). Place the
original face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.
Pick up the handset of the external phone and listen for a dial
tone.
—OR—
Press Monitor and listen for a dial tone.
On the external phone, dial the fax number you want to call. If
you pressed Monitor, dial using the machine dial pad.
When you hear the fax tone,
press Start.
If you are using the ADF, go to Step 6. Send or Receive?
If you are using the scanner glass,
▲ 1.Send
go to Step 5.
▼ 2.Receive
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Press 1 to send a fax.
If you picked up the handset of the external phone, replace it.
6 - 4 TX SETTINGS
Automatic transmission
This is the easiest way to send a fax.
You must not pick up the handset of the external phone or press
Monitor to listen for a dial tone.
1
2
3
4
If it is not illuminated in green, press
(Fax). Place the
original face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.
Enter the fax number using the dial pad, One-Touch, Speed Dial
or Search.
(See One-Touch Dialing on page 7-5 and Speed Dialing on
page 7-6.)
Press Start .
If you are using the scanner glass, press 2 or Start.
Sending a fax at the end of a conversation
At the end of a conversation you can send a fax to the other party
before you both hang up.
1
Ask the other party to wait for fax tones (beeps) and then to
press Start before hanging up.
2
If it is not illuminated in green, press
(Fax). Place the
original face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.
Press Start .
The LCD shows:
Send or Receive?
Press 1 to send the fax.
▲ 1.Send
Replace the external handset.
▼ 2.Receive
3
4
Set
▲ ▼
& Enter
TX SETTINGS 6 - 5
Basic sending operations
Sending faxes using multiple settings
When you send a fax you can choose any combination of these
settings: cover sheet, contrast, resolution, overseas mode, delayed
fax timer, polling transmission or real time transmission. After each
setting is accepted, the LCD will ask if you want to enter more
settings:
Press 1 to select more settings. The
22.TX Settings
Other Settings?
LCD will return to the TX Settings
▲
1.Yes
menu.
▼
2.No
—OR—
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Press 2 if you have finished choosing
settings and go to the next step.
Contrast
If your original is very light or very dark, you may want to set the contrast.
Use Light to make the fax darker.
Use Dark to make the fax lighter.
1
2
3
4
5
If it is not illuminated in green, press
(Fax). Place the
original face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.
Press Menu, 2, 2, 1.
22.TX Settings
1.Contrast
Press
or
to select Auto,
▲
Auto
Light or Dark.
▼
Light
Press Enter.
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Press 1 if you want to choose more
settings and the LCD will return to the TX Settings menu.
—OR—
Press 2 if you have finished choosing settings for this page, and
then go to Step 5.
Enter a fax number.
6 - 6 TX SETTINGS
6
7
8
Press Start to send the fax from the ADF.
The machine starts scanning the first page.
If you are using the scanner glass, go to Step 7.
To send a single page, press 2 (or press Start again).
The machine starts sending the original.
—OR—
To send more than one page, press 1 and go to Step 8.
Place the next page on the scanner glass.
Press Enter .
The machine starts scanning and returns to Step 7. (Repeat
Step 7 and 8 for each additional page).
Fax Resolution
When you have an original in the ADF or on the scanner glass you
can use the Resolution key to change the setting temporarily (for
this fax only). If it is not illuminated in green, press
(Fax).
Press Resolution repeatedly until the LCD shows the setting you
want.
—OR—
You can change the default setting.
1
2
3
4
If it is not illuminated in green, press
(Fax).
Press Menu, 2, 2, 2.
22.TX Settings
2.Resolution
Press
or
to select the
▲
Standard
resolution you want.
▼
Fine
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Press Enter .
Press Stop .
Standard: Suitable for most typed originals.
Fine:
Good for small print and transmits a little slower than
Standard resolution.
EX-Fine:
Good for small print or artwork and transmits slower
than Fine resolution.
Photo:
Use when the original has varying shades of gray.
This has the slowest transmission time.
TX SETTINGS 6 - 7
Manual and automatic fax Redial
If you are sending a fax manually and the line is busy, press
Redial/Pause, and then press Start to try again. If you want to
make a second call to the last number dialed, you can save time by
pressing Redial/Pause and Start.
Redial/Pause only works if you dialed from the control panel.
If you are sending a fax automatically and the line is busy, the
machine will automatically redial one time after five minutes.
6 - 8 TX SETTINGS
Dual Access
You can dial a number, and begin scanning the fax into memory—
even when the machine is receiving, sending or printing a fax from
memory. The LCD shows the new job number and available
memory.
If you get a Out Of Memory message while scanning the first
page of a fax, press Stop to cancel scanning. If you get a Out
Of Memory message while scanning a subsequent page, you
can press Start to send the pages scanned so far, or press
Stop to cancel the operation.
1
2
3
4
5
If it is not illuminated in green, press
(Fax). Place the
original face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.
Enter the fax number.
Press Start to send the fax.
The machine starts scanning the first
page and the LCD shows the job number
(#XXX) of the fax and how much memory is available. You can
repeat Steps 1 to 3 for the next fax.
—OR—
If you are using the scanner glass, go to Step 4.
To send a single page,
Flatbed Fax:
Next Page?
press 2 (or press Start again).
▲ 1.Yes
The machine starts sending the
▼ 2.No(Send)
original.
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
—OR—
To send more than one page,
press 1 and go to Step 5.
Place the next page on the
Flatbed Fax:
scanner glass. Press Enter .
Set Next Page
The machine starts scanning, and
Then Press Enter
then returns to Step 4. (Repeat
Steps 4 and 5 for each additional
page). To send the next fax, go to Step 1.
TX SETTINGS 6 - 9
Real Time Transmission
When you are sending a fax, the machine will scan the originals into
the memory before sending. Then, as soon as the phone line is free,
the machine will start dialing and sending.
If the memory becomes full, the machine will send the original in real
time (even if TX from ADF is set to Off).
Sometimes, you may want to send an important original immediately,
without waiting for memory transmission. You can set TX From ADF
to On for all originals or for the next fax only.
If you want to fax multiple pages, use ADF.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
If it is not illuminated in green, press
(Fax). Place the
original face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.
Press Menu, 2, 2, 5.
22.TX Settings
5.TX from ADF
To change the default setting,
▲
Next Fax Only
press
or
to select On (or
▼
On
Off).
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Press Enter.
Go to Step 5.
—OR—
For the next fax transmission only, press
or
to select
Next Fax Only.
Press Enter.
Press
or
to select Next Fax:On (or Next
Fax:Off).
Press Enter.
Press 1 if you want to choose more settings and the LCD will
return to the TX Settings menu.
—OR—
Press 2 if you have finished choosing settings for this page, and
then go to Step 6.
Enter the fax number.
Press Start to send the fax.
In Real Time Transmission using the scanner glass, the auto
redial function doesn't work.
6 - 10 TX SETTINGS
Checking job status
Check which jobs are still waiting in the memory to be sent. (If there
are no jobs, the LCD shows No Jobs Waiting.)
1 Press Menu, 2, 6.
26.View/Del. Jobs
▲ #001 12:34 ABC COM
2 If you have more than one job
#002 15:00 XYZ
waiting, press
or
to
▼ #003 17:30 B.OFFIC
scroll through the list.
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
3 Press Stop .
Canceling a job while scanning the original
You can cancel a job while you are scanning it into memory by
pressing Stop.
Canceling a scheduled job
You can cancel a fax job that is stored and waiting in memory. (See
Checking job status on page 6-11.)
1 Press Menu, 2, 6.
26.View/Del. Jobs
▲ #001 12:34 ABC COM
Any jobs that are waiting will
#002 15:00 XYZ
appear on the LCD.
▼ #003 17:30 B.OFFIC
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
2 If you have more than two jobs
waiting, press
or
to
select the job you want to cancel.
Press Enter .
—OR—
If you only have one job waiting, go to Step 3.
3 Press 1 to cancel.
—OR—
Press 2 to exit without canceling.
To cancel another job go to Step 2.
4 Press Stop .
TX SETTINGS 6 - 11
Advanced sending operations
Composing the electronic Cover Sheet
The Cover Sheet is created at the receiving machine. Your Cover
Sheet includes the name stored in the One-Touch or Speed Dial
memory. If you’re dialing manually, the name is left blank.
The Cover Sheet shows your Machine ID and the number of sheets
you’re sending. (See Setting the Machine ID on page 4-2.) If you
have Cover Sheet set to ON (Menu, 2, 2, 7), the number of sheets
is left blank.
You can select a comment to include on your Cover Sheet.
1.Comment Off
2.Please Call
3.Urgent
4.Confidential
Instead of using one of the preset comments, you can enter two
personal messages of your own, up to 27 characters long. Use the
chart on page 4-3 for help entering characters.
(See Composing your own comments on page 6-13.)
5.(User Defined)
6.(User Defined)
Most of the TX Settings are temporary to allow you to make
changes for each fax you send. However, when you set up your
Cover Sheet and Cover Sheet Comments, you are changing the
default settings so they will be available while faxing.
6 - 12 TX SETTINGS
Composing your own comments
You can set up two comments of your own.
1
2
3
4
5
If it is not illuminated in green, press
(Fax).
Press Menu, 2, 2, 8.
22.TX Settings
8.Cover Message
Press
or
to choose 5 or
▲
5.
6 for your own comment.
▼
6.
Press Enter .
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Use the dial pad to enter your
customized comment.
Press Enter .
(See Entering text on page 4-3.)
Press 1 if you want to choose more settings and the LCD will
return to the TX Settings menu.
—OR—
Press 2 to exit.
TX SETTINGS 6 - 13
Cover sheet for the next fax only
This feature does not work without the Machine ID. So make sure it
has been set. (See Setting the Machine ID on page 4-2.) If you only
want to send a Cover Sheet with a particular fax, this Cover Sheet
will include the number of sheets in your original.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
If it is not illuminated in green, press
(Fax). Place the
original face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.
Press Menu, 2, 2, 7.
22.TX Settings
7.Cover Sheet
When LCD shows Next Fax
▲
Next Fax Only
Only.
▼
On
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Press Enter.
Press
or
to select Next Fax:On (or Next
Fax:Off).
Press Enter.
Press
or
to select one of the standard or your own
comments.
Press Enter.
Enter two digits to show the number of sheets you are sending.
Press Enter.
(For example, press 0, 2 for 2 pages or enter 0 0 to leave the
number of sheets blank. If you make a mistake, press
to back
up and re-enter the number of sheets.)
Press 1 if you want to choose more settings and the LCD will
return to the TX Settings menu.
—OR—
Press 2 if you have finished choosing settings.
Enter the fax number you’re calling.
Press Start.
6 - 14 TX SETTINGS
Send a cover sheet for all faxes
This feature does not work without the Machine ID. Please be sure it
has been set before continuing. (See Setting the Machine ID on page
4-2.)
You can set the machine to send a cover sheet whenever you send
a fax. The number of sheets in your fax is not included when you use
this setting.
1
2
3
4
5
If it is not illuminated in green, press
(Fax).
Press Menu, 2, 2, 7.
22.TX Settings
7.Cover Sheet
Press
or
to select On.
▲
Next Fax Only
Press Enter .
▼
On
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
If you selected On, Press
or
to select one of the standard or your own comments.
Press Enter .
Press 1 if you want to choose more settings and the LCD will
return to the TX Settings menu.
—OR—
Press 2 to exit if you have finished choosing settings.
Using a printed cover sheet
If you prefer to use a printed cover sheet that you can write on, you
can print the sample sheet and attach it to your fax.
1
2
3
4
5
If it is not illuminated in green, press
(Fax).
Press Menu, 2, 2, 7.
Press
or
to select
22.TX Settings
7.Cover Sheet
Print Sample.
▲
Off
Press Enter .
▼
Print Sample
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Press Start . Your machine prints
a copy of your cover sheet.
Press Stop .
TX SETTINGS 6 - 15
Broadcasting
Broadcasting is when the same fax message is automatically sent to
more than one fax number. Using the Enter key, you can include
Groups, One-Touch, Speed Dial numbers and up to 50 manually
dialed numbers. If you did not use up any of the numbers for Groups,
access codes or credit card numbers, you can ‘broadcast’ faxes to
as many as 390 different numbers. However, the available memory
will vary depending on the types of jobs in the memory and the
number of locations used for broadcasting. If you broadcast to the
maximum numbers available, you will not be able to use Dual Access
and Delayed fax.
To include One-Touch or Speed Dial numbers and manually dialed
numbers in the same broadcast, you must press Enter between
each of the numbers. Use Search/Speed Dial to help you choose
the numbers easily.
(See Setting up Groups for Broadcasting on page 7-4.)
After the broadcast is finished, a Broadcast Report will be printed to
let you know the results.
■ Enter the long dialing sequence numbers as you would normally,
but remember that each One-Touch and Speed Dial number
counts as one number, so the number of locations you can store
becomes limited.
■ If the memory is full, press Stop to stop the job or if more than
one page has been scanned, press Start to send the portion that
is in the memory.
1
2
3
If it is not illuminated in green, press
(Fax). Place the
original face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.
Enter a number using One-Touch, Speed Dial, a Group number,
Search or manual dialing using the dial pad.
(Example: Group number)
When the LCD displays the fax number of the other party, press
Enter.
You will be asked to press the next number.
6 - 16 TX SETTINGS
4
5
6
7
8
9
Enter the next number.
(Example: Speed Dial number)
When the LCD displays the fax number of the other party, press
Enter.
Enter another fax number.
(Example: Manual dialing using the dial pad.)
Press Start .
If you are using the scanner glass, go to Step 8.
To send a single page,
press 2 (or press Start again).
The machine starts sending the fax.
—OR—
To send more than one page, press 1 and go to Step 9.
Place the next page on the scanner glass.
Press Enter .
The machine starts scanning and returns to Step 8. (Repeat
Step 8 and 9 for each additional page).
TX SETTINGS 6 - 17
Overseas Mode
If you are having difficulty sending a fax overseas due to possible
interference on the phone line, we recommend that you turn on the
Overseas Mode. After you send a fax using this feature, the feature
will turn itself off.
1
If it is not illuminated in green, press
(Fax). Place the
original face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.
2 Press Menu, 2, 2, 9.
22.TX Settings
9.Overseas Mode
or
to select On (or
3 Press
▲
On
Off).
▼
Off
Press Enter.
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
4 Press 1 if you want to choose more
settings and the LCD will return to the TX Settings menu.
—OR—
Press 2 if you have finished choosing settings, and then go to
Step 5
5 Enter the fax number you’re calling.
6 Press Start.
If you are using the scanner glass, go to Step 7.
7 To send a single page,
press 2 (or press Start again).
The machine starts sending the fax.
—OR—
To send more than one page, press 1 and go to Step 8.
8 Place the next page on the scanner glass.
Press Enter.
The machine starts scanning and returns to Step 7. (Repeat Steps 7
and 8 for each additional page).
6 - 18 TX SETTINGS
Delayed Send
During the day you can store up to 50 faxes in the memory to be sent
within 24 hours. These faxes will be sent at the time of day you enter
in Step 3. Press Enter to accept it, or enter another time for the faxes
to be sent.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If it is not illuminated in green, press
(Fax). Place the
original face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.
Press Menu, 2, 2, 3.
22.TX Settings
3.Delayed Send
Enter the time you want the fax to
be sent (in 24-hour format).
Set Time=00:00
Press Enter .
Set & Enter
(For example, enter 19:45 for
7:45 PM.)
Press 1 if you want to choose more settings and the LCD will
return to the TX Settings menu.
—OR—
Press 2 if you have finished choosing settings, and then go to Step 5.
Enter the fax number.
Press Start.
If you are using the scanner glass, go to Step 7.
To send a single page, press 2 (or press Start again).
The machine starts scanning the fax.
—OR—
To send more than one page, press 1 and go to Step 8.
Place the next page on the scanner glass.
Press Enter .
The machine starts scanning and returns to Step 7. (Repeat
Step 7 and 8 for each additional page).
The number of pages you can scan into the memory depends
on the amount of data that is printed on each page.
TX SETTINGS 6 - 19
Delayed Batch Transmission
Before sending the delayed faxes, your machine will help you
economize by sorting all the faxes in the memory by destination and
scheduled time. All delayed faxes that are scheduled to be sent at
the same time to the same fax number will be sent as one fax to save
transmission time.
(Fax).
1 If it is not illuminated in green, press
2 Press Menu, 2, 2, 4.
22.TX Settings
4.Batch TX
Press
or
to
select
(or
On
3
▲
On
Off).
▼
Off
Press Enter.
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
4 Press Stop.
6 - 20 TX SETTINGS
Setting up Polled Transmission
Polled Transmission is when you set up your machine to wait with a
paper original so another fax machine can call and retrieve it.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If it is not illuminated in green, press
(Fax). Place the
original that is going to be retrieved face up in the ADF, or face
down on the scanner glass.
Press Menu, 2, 2, 6.
22.TX Settings
6.Poll
Press
or
to choose On
▲
On
(or Off).
▼
Off
Press Enter .
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Press 1 if you want to choose more
settings and the LCD will return to the TX Settings menu.
—OR—
Press 2 if you have finished choosing settings, and go to step 5.
Press Start . The machine starts scanning the document.
If you place the original in the ADF, wait for the fax to be polled.
—OR—
If you are using the scanner glass, go to Step 7.
To send a single page, press 2 (or press Start again), wait for
the fax to be polled.
—OR—
To send more than one page, press 1 and go to Step 8.
Place the next page on the scanner glass.
Press Enter .
The machine starts scanning and returns to Step 7. (Repeat
Step 7 and 8 for each additional page).
The document will be stored and can be retrieved from any other
fax machine until you delete the fax in memory by using the
Cancelling a Job function. (See Canceling a scheduled job on
page 6-11.)
TX SETTINGS 6 - 21
Memory Security
Memory Security lets you prevent unauthorized access to the
machine. The machine will not send faxes or print received faxes
without the password you program. You will not be able to continue
to schedule Delayed Send or Polling jobs. However, any
pre-scheduled Delayed Send Faxes will be sent when you turn
Memory Security On, so they won't be lost.
If Remote Retrieve or Fax Forward is On before you turn
Memory Security On, then Fax Forwarding and Remote Retrieval will
continue to work.
While Memory Security is On the following operations are available:
■ Receiving faxes into memory (limited by memory capacity)
■ Fax Forwarding
■ Remote Retrieval
To print the faxes in memory, turn Memory Security Off.
Setting up the password
1
2
3
Press Menu, 2, 0, 1.
20.Miscellaneous
1.Mem Security
Enter a 4-digit number for the
password.
New Passwd=xxxx
Set & Enter
Press Enter.
If you are entering the password for the first time, the LCD
shows Verify.
Re-enter the password.
Press Enter.
6 - 22 TX SETTINGS
Turning Memory Security on
1 Press Menu, 2, 0, 1.
2
3
20.Miscellaneous
1.Mem Security
▲
Set Security
▼
Set Password
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Press
or
to select Set
Security.
Press Enter .
Enter the registered 4-digit password.
Press Enter .
The machine goes offline and the LCD shows Secure Mode.
If there is a power failure, the data in the memory will remain for
up to 4 days.
Turning Memory Security off
1
2
Press Menu.
Enter the registered 4-digit password and press Enter.
Memory Security is automatically turned off and the LCD shows
the Date and Time.
If you enter the wrong Password, the LCD shows Wrong
Password and stays offline. The machine will stay in Secure
Mode until the registered password is entered.
TX SETTINGS 6 - 23
7
Auto Dial numbers and
dialing options
Storing numbers for easy dialing
You can set up your machine to do three types of easy dialing:
One-Touch, Speed Dial and Groups for Broadcasting faxes.
If you lose electrical power, the auto dial numbers that are in the
memory will not be lost.
Storing One-Touch Dial numbers
Your machine has 20 One-Touch keys where
you can store 40 fax or phone numbers for
automatic dialing. To access numbers 21 to 40,
hold down Shift as you press the One-Touch
key. When you press a One-Touch key the LCD
shows the name, if you stored it, or the number. (See One-Touch
Dialing on page 7-5.)
One-Touch keys are the 20 keys (numbers 01–40) located on the left
side of the control panel.
1
2
3
Press Menu, 2, 3, 1.
23.Dialer Setting
1.One-Touch
Press the One-Touch key where
you want to store a number.
One-Touch:
If you have not installed the optional Select One-Touch
Network board, go to Step 4.
—OR—
If you have installed the optional Network board, the machine
will ask you if the One-Touch key is for a fax/telephone number
or an e-mail address. Go to Step 3.
Press
or
to select
23.Dialer Setting
*007
Fax/Tel.
▲
Fax/Tel
Press Enter .
▼
Set
E-Address
& Enter
▲ ▼
AUTO DIAL NUMBERS AND DIALING OPTIONS 7 - 1
4
5
6
Enter a number (up to 20 digits).
Press Enter.
■ If you want to enter a pause in the dialing sequence (for example, to access
an outside line), press Redial/Pause as you are entering the digits.
Each key press of Redial/Pause enters a 3.5 second pause when the
number is dialed, and a dash appears on the screen.
Use the dial pad to enter the name (up to 15 characters).
Press Enter.
(You can use the chart on page 4-3 to help you enter letters.)
—OR—
Press Enter to store the number without a name.
Go to Step 2 to store another One-Touch number
—OR—
Press Stop.
When you dial an auto dial number, the LCD shows the name
and number you’ve stored, or, if you haven’t stored a name, only
the number you’ve stored.
Storing Speed Dial numbers
You can store Speed Dial numbers, so that when you dial you will only
have to press a few keys (Search/Speed Dial, #, the three-digit
number, and Start ). The machine can store 300 Speed Dial numbers.
1 Press Menu, 2, 3, 2.
23.Dialer Setting
2.Speed Dial
2 Use the dial pad to enter a
three-digit Speed Dial number
Speed Dial? #
(001-300).
Set & Enter
(For example, press 005.)
Press Enter.
If you have not installed the optional Network board, go to Step
4.
—OR—
If you have installed the optional Network board, the machine
will ask you if the Speed Dial is for a fax/telephone number or an
e-mail address. Go to Step 3.
or
to select
3 Press
23.Dialer Setting
#005
Fax/Tel.
▲
Fax/Tel
Press Enter.
▼
Set
7 - 2 AUTO DIAL NUMBERS AND DIALING OPTIONS
E-Address
& Enter
▲ ▼
4
5
6
Enter the phone or fax number (up to 20 digits).
Press Enter .
Use the dial pad to enter the name (up to 15 characters).
Press Enter .
(You can use the chart on page 4-3 to help you enter letters.)
—OR—
Press Enter to store the number without a name.
Go to Step 2 to store another Speed Dial number.
—OR—
Press Stop .
Changing One-Touch and Speed Dial numbers
If you try to store a One-Touch or Speed Dial number where a
number has already been stored, the LCD will show the name that
has been stored there (or number) and will ask you to do one of the
following:
1 Press 1 to change the stored
23.Dialer Setting
*005:MIKE
number.
▲
1.Change
—OR—
▼
2.Exit
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Press 2 to exit without making a
change.
2 Enter a new number.
Press Enter .
■ To erase the whole number or whole name, press
Clear/Black repeatedly until all digits or letters are deleted.
To erase one digit or letter, use
or
to position the
cursor under it, and then press Clear/Black.
3
■ If you want to insert characters, use
or
to position the
cursor where you want to insert them, and then type.
Follow the directions beginning at Step 4 in Storing One-Touch
Dial numbers and Storing Speed Dial numbers.(See Storing
One-Touch Dial numbers on page 7-1 and Storing Speed Dial
numbers on page 7-2.)
AUTO DIAL NUMBERS AND DIALING OPTIONS 7 - 3
Setting up Groups for Broadcasting
Groups, which can be stored on a One-Touch key or a Speed Dial
location, allow you to send the same fax message to many fax
numbers by pressing only a One-Touch key and Start or
Search/Speed Dial, #, the three-digit location and Start.
First, you'll need to store each fax number as a One-Touch or Speed
Dial number. Then, you can combine them into a Group, Each Group
uses up a One-Touch key or a Speed Dial location. Finally, you can
have up to six small Groups, or you can assign up to 339 numbers to
one large Group.
(See Storing Speed Dial numbers on page 7-2 and Changing
One-Touch and Speed Dial numbers on page 7-3.)
1 Press Menu, 2, 3, 3.
23.Dialer Setting
3.Setup Groups
Decide
where
you
wish
to
store
the
2
Group
Group Dial:
Press Speed Dial...
—AND—
Press a One-Touch key
—OR—
Press Search/Speed Dial and enter the three-digit location,
and then press Enter .
(For example, press One-Touch key 2 for Group 1.)
3 Use the dial pad to enter the Group 23.Dialer Setting
*002
number.
Press Enter.
Group#:
(For example, press 1 for Group 1.) Set No. & Enter
4 To include One-Touch or Speed Dial numbers in the Group,
enter them as if you were dialing.
For example, for One-Touch key 05, press One-Touch key 05.
For Speed Dial location 009, press Search/Speed Dial, then
press 009 on the dial pad. The LCD shows 005, #009.
5 Press Enter to accept the numbers for this Group.
6 Use the dial pad and the chart on page 4-3 to enter a name for
the Group.
Press Enter.
(For example, NEW CLIENTS)
7 - 4 AUTO DIAL NUMBERS AND DIALING OPTIONS
7
Press Stop .
You can print a list of all One-Touch and Speed Dial numbers.
(See Printing reports on page 9-3.) Group numbers will be
marked in the column of 'Group'.
Dialing options
When you dial using an auto dial number, the LCD shows the
name you’ve stored, or if you haven’t stored a name, the fax
number you’ve stored.
Search
You can search for names you have stored in the One-Touch and
Speed Dial memory.
(See Storing One-Touch Dial numbers on page 7-1 and see Storing
Speed Dial numbers on page 7-2.)
1
2
3
4
If it is not illuminated in green, press
(Fax). Place the
original face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.
Press Search/Speed Dial .
Press
or .
To search alphabetically through the names that are stored, enter
the first letter of the name you’re looking for and press
or
.
—OR—
Press
or
.
To search for numbers numerically, press
or
.
When the LCD shows the name you want to call,
Press Start .
One-Touch Dialing
1
2
3
If it is not illuminated in green, press
(Fax). Place the
original face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.
Press the One-Touch key of the location you want to call.
Press Start .
AUTO DIAL NUMBERS AND DIALING OPTIONS 7 - 5
Speed Dialing
1
2
3
If it is not illuminated in green, press
(Fax). Place the
original face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.
Press Search/Speed Dial, #, and then the three-digit Speed
Dial number. (See Storing Speed Dial numbers on page 7-2.)
Press Start.
If you try to use a One-Touch or Speed Dial location with no
number stored in it, you hear a warning sound, and LCD shows
Not Registered. The LCD returns to normal after 2 seconds.
Manual dialing
Manual dialing means pressing all of the digits of the phone number.
Using an external telephone
The easiest way to use your external telephone is to pick up the
handset and dial the number on the external telephone as you
normally would.
1 Pick up the handset of the external telephone.
2 Dial the number on the external telephone.
3 To hang up, replace the handset.
7 - 6 AUTO DIAL NUMBERS AND DIALING OPTIONS
Access codes and credit card numbers
Sometimes you may want to choose from several long distance
carriers when you make a call. Rates may vary depending on the time
and destination. To take advantage of low rates, you can store the
access codes or long-distance carriers and credit card numbers as
One-Touch and Speed Dial numbers. You can store these long dialing
sequences by dividing them and setting them up on separate keys in
any combination. You can even include manual dialing using the dial
pad.
The combined number will be dialed in the order that you entered it
as soon as you press Start.
(See Storing One-Touch Dial numbers on page 7-1.)
For example, you can store ‘555’ on One-Touch key 03 and ‘7000’
on One-Touch key 02. If you press One-Touch key 03, One-Touch
key 02, and Start , you will dial ‘555-7000’.
To temporarily change a number, you can substitute part of the
number with manual dialing using the dial pad.
For example, to change the number to 555-7001 you could press
One-Touch key 03 and then press 7001 using the dialing pad.
If you must wait for another dial tone or signal at any point in the
dialing sequence, store a pause there in the number by pressing
Redial/Pause. Each key press adds a 3.5-second delay.
AUTO DIAL NUMBERS AND DIALING OPTIONS 7 - 7
Pause
Press Redial/Pause to insert a 3.5-second pause between
numbers. If you are dialing overseas, you can press Redial/Pause
as many times as needed to increase the length of the pause.
Tone or Pulse
If you have a Pulse dialing service, but need to send Tone signals
(for example, for telephone banking), follow the instructions below. If
you have Touch Tone service, you will not need this feature to send
tone signals.
1 Lift the handset of an external phone.
2 Press # on the control panel of your machine. Any digits dialed
after this will send tone signals.
3 When you hang up, the machine will return to the Pulse dialing
service.
7 - 8 AUTO DIAL NUMBERS AND DIALING OPTIONS
8
Remote Fax Options
Fax Forwarding
Programming a Fax Forwarding number
When Fax Forwarding is set to On, your machine stores the received
fax in the memory. Then it dials the fax number you’ve programmed
and forwards the fax message.
1 Press Menu, 2, 5, 1.
25.Remote Fax Opt
1.RMT RTV/FX FWD
or
to select Fax
2 Press
▲
Off
Forward.
▼
Remote Retrieve
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Press Enter .
The LCD will ask you to enter the fax number to which faxes will
be forwarded.
3 Enter the forwarding number (up to 20 digits).
Press Enter .
or
to select On (or
4 Press
25.Remote Fax Opt
Local Print
Off) and press Enter.
▲
On
5 Press Stop .
▼
Off
Set
▲ ▼
& Enter
REMOTE FAX OPTIONS 8 - 1
Setting Remote Retrieval
You can call your machine from any fax machine using touch tone and
use a Remote Retrieval Passcode and other button presses to retrieve
fax messages. Cut out the Remote Retrieval Access Card on the last
page and keep it in your wallet as an aid. The R R Passcode is preset
to 1 5 9 , but you can change this. The cannot be changed.
1 Press Menu, 2, 5, 1. The screen 25.Remote Fax Opt
1.RMT RTV/FX FWD
prompts you to choose a fax
▲
Off
setting.
▼
Remote Retrieve
or
to select
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
2 Press
Remote Retrieve, and then
press Enter.
3 Enter a 3-digit number from 000 to 25.Remote Fax Opt
1.RMT RTV/FX FWD
999 and press Enter .
4
5
Press
or
to select On (or
Off) and press Enter .
Press Stop.
If there are faxes in memory when
you turn RMT RTV/FX FWD to
Off. The screen prompts you to
print faxes in memory.
If you press 1, all fax data is printed
and erased and then RMT RTV/FX
FWD is turned Off.
If you press 2, the screen prompts
you to erase faxes in memory.
Passcode:--Set & Enter
25.Remote Fax Opt
Local Print
▲
On
▼
Off
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
25.Remote Fax Opt
Print Fax
▲
1.Yes
▼
2.No
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
25.Remote Fax Opt
Erase All Fax?
▲
1.Yes
▼
2.No
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Local Print
If you have selected Remote Retrieve or Fax Forward and set
Local Print to On, your machine automatically prints faxes as
they are received into memory. This is a safety feature in ease the
power goes out so you won’t lose your message.
8 - 2 REMOTE FAX OPTIONS
Using R R Passcode
1
2
3
4
5
6
Dial your fax number from a telephone or another fax machine
using touch tone.
When your machine answers, immediately enter your R R
Passcode (3 digits followed by ).
The machine signals if it has received fax messages:
1 long beep — Fax messages
No beeps — No fax messages
The machine gives two short beeps, which tells you to enter a
command. The machine will hang up if you wait longer than 30
seconds to enter a command. The machine will beep three
times, if you enter an invalid command.
Press 90 to reset the machine when you’ve finished.
Hang up.
If your machine is set to Manual mode and you want to use the
remote retrieval features, you can access your machine by
waiting about 2 minutes after it starts ringing, and then entering
the R R Passcode within 30 seconds.
REMOTE FAX OPTIONS 8 - 3
Remote commands
Follow the commands below to access features when you are away
from the machine. When you call the machine and enter your R R
Passcode (3 digits followed by ), the system will give two short
beeps and you must enter a remote command.
Remote Commands
95
Changing Remote
Retrieval/Fax Forwarding
1 OFF
2 Remote Retrieval
3 Fax Forwarding
4 FAX FWD No.
96
97
2 Retrieve all faxes
Enter the number of a remote fax machine to
receive stored fax message(s). (See Page
8-1.)
3 Erase fax from the
memory
If you hear one long beep, you can erase fax
message(s) from the memory.
Check the Receiving Status
You can check whether your machine has
received any fax message(s). If yes, you will
hear one long beep. If no, you will hear three
short beeps.
Change Receive Mode
1 EXTERNAL TAM
2 FAX/TEL
3 FAX ONLY
90
If you hear one long beep, the change is
accepted. If you hear three short beeps, you
cannot change it because the conditions have
not been met. (Example: registering
number). You can register your fax
forwarding number by using 4. FAX FWD NO
(See Page 8-1). Once you have registered
the number, your machine will change
automatically to FAX FWD:ON mode.
Retrieve a fax
1 Fax
98
Operation Details
Exit
8 - 4 REMOTE FAX OPTIONS
If you hear one long beep, you can change
the Answer Mode.
If you hear three short beeps, you cannot
change it.
After a long beep, you can exit remote
retrieval.
Retrieving fax messages
1
2
3
4
Dial your fax number.
When your machine answers, immediately enter your R R
Passcode (3 digits followed by ). If you hear one long beep,
you have messages.
As soon as you hear two short beeps, use the dial pad to press
962.
Wait for the long beep, and then use the dial pad to enter the
number of the remote fax machine where you want your fax
messages sent to followed by ## (up to 20 digits).
You cannot use
and # as dial numbers. However, press # if
you want to store a pause.
5
Hang up after you hear your machine beep. Your machine will
call the other machine, which will then print your fax messages.
Changing your Fax Forwarding number
You can change the default setting of your fax forwarding number
from another telephone or fax machine using Touch Tone.
1 Dial your fax number.
2 When your machine answers, immediately enter your R R
Passcode (3 digits followed by ). If you hear one long beep,
you have messages.
3 When you hear two short beeps, use the dial pad to press 954.
4 Wait for the long beep, and then use the dial pad to enter the
new number of the remote fax machine where you want your fax
messages forwarded followed by ## (up to 20 digits).
You cannot use
and # as dial numbers. However, press # if
you want to store a pause.
5
Hang up after you hear your machine beep.
REMOTE FAX OPTIONS 8 - 5
9
Printing reports
Machine settings and journal
You need to set up the Job Status Report and Journal Interval in the
menu selection table.
Press Menu, 2, 4, 1.
—OR—
Press Menu, 2, 4, 2.
24.Setup Reports
1.Job Status Rpt
2.Journal
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Customizing the Job Status Report
You can use the Job Status Report as proof that you sent a fax. This
report lists the time and date of transmission and whether the
transmission was successful (OK). If you select All or All+Image,
the report will print for every fax you send.
If you send a lot of faxes to the same place, you may need more than
the job numbers to know which faxes you must send again. Selecting
All+Image or Inc+Image will print a section of the fax’s first page
on the report to help you remember.
When the feature is Incomplete, the Report will only print it
there is a transmission error. (NG).
1
2
3
Press Menu, 2, 4, 1.
Press
or
to select
Incomplete, Inc+Image,
All or All+Image.
Press Enter .
Press Stop .
24.Setup Reports
1.Job Status Rpt
▲
Incomplete
▼
Inc+Image
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
PRINTING REPORTS 9 - 1
Setting the Journal Interval
You can set the machine to print journal at specific intervals (every 50
faxes, 6, 12 or 24 hours, 2 or 7 days). If you set the interval to Off, you
can print the report by following the Steps on the next page.
The default setting is Every 50 Faxes.
1
2
3
4
24.Setup Reports
Press Menu, 2, 4, 2.
2.Journal
Press
or
to choose an
▲
Every 50 Faxes
interval. Press Enter.
▼
Every 6 Hours
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
(If you choose 7 days, the LCD will
ask you to choose a day on which
to begin the 7-day countdown.)
Enter the time to begin printing in 24-hour format.
Press Enter.
(For example: enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)
Press Stop.
If you select 6, 12, 24 hours, 2 or 7 days, the machine will print
the report at the selected time and then erase all jobs from its
memory. If the machine’s memory becomes full with 200 jobs
before the time you selected has passed, the machine will print
the Journal early and then erase all jobs from memory. If you
want an extra report before it is due to print, you can print it
without erasing the jobs from memory.
If you select Every 50 Faxes, the machine will print the Journal
when the machine has stored 50 jobs.
9 - 2 PRINTING REPORTS
Printing reports
Five reports are available:
1.Help List
Prints the Help List so you can see at-a-glance
how to quickly program your machine.
2.Dialer Dir
Lists names and numbers stored in the
One-Touch and Speed Dial memory, in numerical
order.
3.Journal
Lists information about the last incoming and
outgoing faxes.
(TX means Transmit.) (RX means Receive.)
4.Job Status Rpt
Prints a Job Status Report for your last
transmission.
5.Mach. Settings
Lists your settings.
6.Order Form
You can print a supplies order form that you can
fax to request new supplies.
To print a report
1 Press Menu, 5.
2
3
Press
or
to select the report you want.
Press Enter .
—OR—
Enter the number of the report you want to print.
For example, press 1 to print the Help List.
Press Start .
PRINTING REPORTS 9 - 3
10 Making copies
Using the machine as a copier
You can use your machine as a copier, making up to 99 copies at a
time.
Enter Copy mode
Before making copies, make sure that
in green. If it is not, press
(Copy) is illuminated
(Copy) to enter Copy mode. The
default setting is Fax. You can change the number of seconds or
minutes that the machine stays in Copy mode after a copy operation.
(See Setting the Mode Timer on page 4-5.)
The printable area of your machine begins at approximately 0.14 in.
(3.64 mm) from both sides and 0.12 in. (3 mm) from the top or bottom
of the paper.
Ex: Letter (Original)
0.14" (3.64mm)
Letter (Paper)
Unprintable
area
0.12" (3mm)
MAKING COPIES 10 - 1
Temporary copy settings
You can improve your copies by using the Temporary Copy Keys:
Enlarge/Reduce, Contrast, Mode, Tray Select, Sort and
Duplex/N in 1. These settings are temporary, and the machine
returns to Fax mode 1 minute after it finishes copying. If you want to
use these temporary settings again, place the next original in the
ADF or on the scanner glass within that time. However, if you have
set the Mode Timer for Copy and Scan modes to 0 to 30 seconds,
the machine returns to the default settings after the number of
seconds that has been set for Mode Timer. (See Setting the Mode
Timer on page 4-5 and see Using the copy keys (Temporary settings)
on page 10-6.)
Temporary Copy Keys
While the machine is copying, incoming faxes will be received
into the memory instead of being printed.
10 - 2 MAKING COPIES
Making a single copy from the ADF
1
Press
2
face up in the ADF.
Press Start .
Do NOT pull on the original while copying is in progress.
(Copy) to illuminate it in green. Place the original
To stop copying and eject the original, press Stop.
Making multiple copies from the ADF
1
2
3
Press
(Copy) to illuminate it in green. Insert the original
face up in the ADF.
Use the dial pad to enter the number of copies you want (up to
99).
Press Start .
To sort the copies, press the Sort key.
MAKING COPIES 10 - 3
Single or multiple copies using the scanner glass
You can make multiple copies using the scanner glass. Multiple copies
will be stacked (all copies of page 1, then all copies of page 2, and so
on). Use the Temporary Copy keys to choose more settings. (See Using
the copy keys (Temporary settings) on page 10-6.)
1
Press
(Copy) to illuminate it in green. Lift the Document
Cover.
Place the originals
Face Down on the
Scanner Glass
Document
Guidelines
2
3
4
Using the document guidelines on the left, center the original
face down on the scanner glass and close the document cover.
Using the dial pad, enter the number of copies you want (up to
99).
For example, press 3 8 for 38 copies.
Press Start.
The machine will start scanning the original.
If you want to sort multiple copies, use the ADF.
(See Making a single copy from the ADF on page 10-3.)
10 - 4 MAKING COPIES
Out of Memory message
If the memory becomes full while you
are making copies, the LCD message
Copy:Press Start
will guide you through the next step.
Quit:Press Stop
If the Out Of Memory message
appears, press Stop to cancel or Start
to copy scanned pages. You will need to clear some jobs from the
memory before you can continue.
Out of Memory
To gain extra memory, you can turn off Fax Storage.
—OR—
Print the faxes that are in the memory. (See Printing a fax from
the memory on page 5-5.)
When you get an Out Of Memory message, you may be able to
make copies if you first print incoming faxes in the memory to restore
the memory to 100%.
Then if this error message appears more than once you may
wish to consider increasing the memory size. For more
information on how to increase the memory size, See Memory
board on page 23-1.
MAKING COPIES 10 - 5
Using the copy keys
(Temporary settings)
When you want to change the settings only for the next copy, use the
Temporary Copy Keys.
Temporary Copy Keys
You can use different combinations. The large LCD shows your
current Copy mode settings.
Enlg/Red:100%
Mode
:Auto
Contrast:+
Tray
:#1(LTR)
Press▲▼ or Start
01
Example of Copy mode LCD
10 - 6 MAKING COPIES
Duplex N in 1
Enlarge/Reduce
You can select the following enlargement or reduction ratios.
Auto sets the machine to calculate the reduction ratio that fits the
size of your paper. (Auto appears only when you place the
document in the ADF.)
Custom allows you to enter a ratio from 25% to 400%.
Press Enlarge/Reduce
100%
104% (EXE → LTR)
141% (A5 → A4)
200%
Auto
Custom (25 - 400%)
50%
70% (A4 → A5)
78% (LGL → LTR)
83% (LGL → A4)
85% (LTR → EXE)
91% (Full Page)
94% (A4 → LTR)
97% (LTR → A4)
1
2
3
4
Press
(Copy) to illuminate it in green. Place the original
face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.
Use the dial pad to enter the number of copies you want
(up to 99).
Press Enlarge/Reduce.
Enlg/Red:100%
Mode
:Auto
Press Enlarge/Reduce or .
Contrast:+
Tray
:#1(LTR)
01
MAKING COPIES 10 - 7
5
6
Press
or
to select the enlargement or reduction ratio
you want.
Press Enter.
—OR—
You can select Custom and press Enter.
Use the dial pad to enter an enlargement or reduction ratio from
25% to 400%.
Press Enter.
(For example, press 5 3 to enter 53%.)
Press Start.
—OR—
Press other temporary copy keys for more settings.
■ Special Copy Options (2in1, 4in1 or Poster) are not available
with Enlarge/Reduce.
■ Auto is not available with the scanner glass.
Copy Mode (type of original)
You can select the Quality for your type of original. The default
setting is Auto, which is used for originals that contain both text and
photographs. Text is used for originals containing only text. Photo is
used for copying photographs.
1
2
3
4
5
Press
(Copy) to illuminate it in green. Place the original
face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.
Use the dial pad to enter the number of copies you want
(up to 99).
Press Mode.
Press
or
to choose the type of original (Auto, Text or
Photo).
Press Enter.
Press Start.
—OR—
Press other Temporary Copy keys for more settings.
10 - 8 MAKING COPIES
Sorting copies using the ADF
If you want to sort multiple copies, use the ADF. Pages will be printed
in the order 123, 123, 123, and so on.
1
Press
(Copy) to illuminate it in green. Place the original
face up in the ADF.
2
3
4
Use the dial pad to enter the number of copies you want
(up to 99).
Press Sort.
Press Start .
—OR—
Press other Temporary Copy keys for more settings.
Contrast
You can adjust copy contrast to make copies darker or lighter.
1
2
3
4
5
Press
(Copy) to illuminate it in green. Place the original
face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.
Use the dial pad to enter the number of copies you want
(up to 99).
Press Contrast .
Press
to make a copy lighter
—OR—
Press
to make a copy darker.
Press Enter .
Press Start .
—OR—
Press other Temporary Copy keys for more settings.
Press Contrast
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
MAKING COPIES 10 - 9
Tray Select
You can change the tray use only for the next copy.
1
2
3
4
5
Press
(Copy) to illuminate it in green. Place the original
face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.
Use the dial pad to enter the number of copies you want
(up to 99).
Press Tray Select.
Press
or
to select the tray usage.
Press Enter.
Press Start.
—OR—
Press other Temporary Copy keys for more settings.
Press Tray Select
Auto
#1 (XXX)*
#2 (XXX)* (with the
optional lower tray)
MP Tray
* XXX is the paper size you set in Menu, 1. 3.
10 - 10 MAKING COPIES
Duplex/N in 1
‘Duplex’ prints on both sides of the paper.
Level 2
Option
N in 1
—
2 in 1 (P)
original
1
2 in 1 (L)
2
Finished Layout
1
1
1
2
2
4 in 1 (P)
1 2
1
4 in 1 (L)
2
1
2
Duplex(1 in 1)
Portrait1
Portrait2
—
1
Single Sided
2
3
4
1
2
1
1
1
2
Landscape1
3 4
1
2
2
1
Double Sided
2
2
Single Sided
1
Double Sided
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
Duplex(2 in 1)
—
—
1
Portrait1
1
Portrait2
1
Landscape1
2
1
1
2
3
1
2
2
2
3
Landscape2
2
1
1
2
Landscape2
2
Portrait1
1
Portrait2
1
Landscape1
2
2
2
1
2
Poster
—
Off
—
3 5
1 2
1
Landscape2
1 2
4
1
2
3
5
1
3
4
5
—
5
Duplex(4 in 1)
3
1
1
3
Press
Duplex/N in 1
Level 1
2
Temporary
key
1
—
—
MAKING COPIES 10 - 11
Duplex/N in 1 copy
N in 1 copy
You can save paper by copying either two or four pages onto one
page. Please make sure paper size is set to A4, Letter or Legal.
1
2
3
4
5
Press
(Copy) to illuminate it in green. Place the original
face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.
Use the dial pad to enter the number of copies you want
(up to 99).
Press Duplex/N in 1.
Press Enter to select N in 1.
Press
or
to select 2 in 1(P), 2 in 1(L), 4 in
1(P)or 4 in 1(L).
Press Enter.
If you are ready to copy, go to Step 7.
Enlg/Red:100%
Mode
:Auto
—OR—
Contrast:+
Press
or
to select Mode,
Tray
:#1(LTR)
Contrast or Tray.
Press▲▼ or Start
Press Enter.
Press or
to select a new setting.
Press Enter.
Press Start.
If you are using the ADF, the machine scans the originals and
prints the copies.
—OR—
If you are using the scanner glass,
Flatbed Copy:
Next Page?
the machine scans the page.
▲ 1.Yes
Place the next original on the
▼ 2.No
scanner glass.
Set ▲▼ & Enter
Select 1 and press Enter, or press
1, to copy next page.
Repeat Step 7 and 8 for each page of the layout.
After all the pages of the original have been scanned,
select 2 and press Enter , or press 2, to print the copies.
01
6
7
8
9
10
10 - 12 MAKING COPIES
(P) means Portrait and (L) means Landscape.
You can also combine the N in 1 and Duplex operations. (See
Duplex (2 in 1) and Duplex (4 in 1) on page 10-15.)
For 2 in 1(P), 2 in 1(L), 4 in 1 (P) or 4 in 1 (L), you
can not use the Enlarge/Reduce setting.
Poster
You can make a poster
size copy of a
photograph. You must
use the scanner glass.
1
2
3
Place the original face
down on the scanner glass.
Press Duplex/N in 1 and
or
to select Poster.
Press Enter .
Press Start .
The machine starts scanning the original and prints the pages
for the poster.
For Poster copies, you cannot make more than one copy or use
the Enlarge/Reduce setting.
Duplex (1 in 1)
Make a double-sided copy from a single-sided original
1
2
1
2
1
Press
(Copy) to illuminate it in green. Place the original
face up in the ADF, or face down the scanner glass.
2
3
Use the dial pad to enter the number of copies you want (up to 99).
Press Duplex/N in 1 and
or
to select Duplex(1 in 1).
Press Enter .
MAKING COPIES 10 - 13
4
Press
or
to select Portrait1, Portrait2,
Landscape1 or Landscape2.
Press Enter.
If you selected Portrait1 or Landscape2, go to Step 6.
or
to select Single Sided for the original (If
5 Press
you are using the scanner glass or changed the number of copies
at Step 2, this option will not appear).
Press Enter.
6 Press Start to scan the original.
If you placed the original in the ADF, the machine starts printing.
—OR—
If you placed the original on the scanner glass, go to Step 7.
7 Select 1 and press Enter or press 1 to copy next page.
8 After all the pages of the original have been scanned, select 2 and
press Enter, or press 2.
Make a double-sided copy from a double-sided original
(Not available for multiple copies)
1
1
2
1
Press
2
( Copy) to illuminate it in green. Place the original
face up in the ADF.
2
3
4
5
6
7
Press Duplex/N in 1 and
or
to select Duplex(1 in 1).
Press Enter.
Press
or
to select Portrait2 or Landscape1.
Press Enter.
Press
or
to select Double Sided for the original.
Press Enter.
Press Start . Make sure that you have put the original in the ADF
as shown on the LCD.
After all the pages of the original have been scanned on one
side, turn the other side of the original face up in the ADF.
Press Start.
10 - 14 MAKING COPIES
Duplex (2 in 1) and Duplex (4 in 1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Press
(Copy) to illuminate it in green. Place the original
face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.
Use the dial pad to enter the number of copies you want
(up to 99).
Press Duplex/N in 1 and
or
to select Duplex(2 in
1) or Duplex(4 in 1).
Press Enter .
Press
or
to select Portrait1, Portrait2,
Landscape1 or Landscape2.
Press Enter .
Press Start to scan the original.
If you placed the original in the ADF, the machine starts printing.
—OR—
If you placed the original on the scanner glass, go to Step 6.
Place the next original on the scanner glass.
Select 1 and press Enter or press 1 to copy next page.
After all the pages of the original have been scanned, select 2
and press Enter or press 2.
MAKING COPIES 10 - 15
Changing the default copy settings
You can adjust the copy settings that are shown in the chart. These
settings will stay until you change them again.
Submenu
Feature
Selections
Options
Factory Settings
1.Copy Mode
—
Text
Auto
Photo
Auto
—
2.Contrast
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
Copy Mode
1
2
3
Press Menu, 3, 1.
Press
or
to select Text,
Photo or Auto.
Press Enter.
Press Stop.
31.Copy Mode
▲
Auto
Text
▼
Photo
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Contrast
You can change the contrast to help an image look lighter or darker.
1 Press Menu, 3, 2.
32.Contrast
2
Press
3
—OR—
Press
to make darker.
Press Enter.
Press Stop.
to make lighter.
10 - 16 MAKING COPIES
Set
+
& Enter
the Machine as a
11 Using
printer
Using the ix2700 printer driver
A Printer Driver is software that translates data from the format used
by a computer into the format required by a particular printer, using
a printer command language or page description language.
The printer drivers are on the CD-ROM we have supplied. Install the
drivers first by following the Quick Setup Guide.
Windows® Printing
The dedicated printer driver and TrueType™ compatible fonts for
Microsoft® Windows ® 95/98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional/XP and
Windows NT® workstation 4.0 are available on the CD-ROM
supplied with your machine. You can install them easily into your
Windows® system using our installer program. The driver supports
our unique compression mode to enhance printing speed in
Windows® applications, and allows you to set various printer
settings, including economy printing mode and custom paper size.
Popular Printer Emulation Support
The machine supports HP LaserJet (PCL level 6) and BR-Script 3
(Post Script 3) printer emulation mode. If you use DOS application
software, you can use HP LaserJet (PCL level 6) and BR-Script 3
(Post Script 3) emulation mode for printer operations.
USING THE MACHINE AS A PRINTER 11 - 1
How to print your document
When the machine receives data from your computer, it begins
printing by picking up paper from the paper tray. The paper tray can
feed many types of paper and envelopes.
1
2
3
From your computer select the Print command.
If your computer is also connected to any other printers, select
Imagistics ix2700 (USB) Printer as your printer driver from the
Print or Print Settings menu in your software application, and
then click on OK to begin printing.
Your computer sends a print command and data to the machine.
The LED blinks in yellow and the machine starts to print.
You can select the paper size, and orientation in your
application software.
If your application software does not support your custom paper size,
select the next largest paper size.
Then adjust the print area by changing the right and left margins in
your application software.
11 - 2 USING THE MACHINE AS A PRINTER
Simultaneous printing and faxing
Your machine can print from your computer while sending or receiving
a fax, and scanning the original into the computer. Fax sending will not
be stopped during PC printing.
Two-sided printing (Duplex Printing)
The supplied printer driver supports duplex printing. (For more
information, see Duplex Printing on page 12-7.)
Automatic Duplex Printing
In this mode, the machine prints on both sides of the A4, Letter or
Legal paper automatically.
1 Open the Properties dialog box in the printer driver.
2 Select Duplex Printing mode in the Advanced tab, make sure
that ‘Use Duplex Unit’ has been selected, and then click the OK
button. (See Duplex Printing on page 12-7.) The printer will print
on both sides of the paper automatically.
■ When you select Use Duplex Unit, HQ1200 is not available.
■ If you also want to use Duplex Printing for fax and copy
operations, see To use Automatic Duplexing for fax, copy
and print operations on page 2-9.
USING THE MACHINE AS A PRINTER 11 - 3
Manual Duplex Printing
The machine prints all the
even-numbered pages on one
side of the paper first.
Then, the Windows® driver
instructs you (with a pop-up
message) to reinsert the paper.
Before reinserting the paper,
straighten it well, or you may get
a paper jam. Very thin or very
thick paper is not recommended.
We recommend 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) paper.
Face-down output tray
The machine ejects paper with printed surfaces face down into the
output tray in the front of the machine. Unfold the support flap to
support the printed pages.
When printing transparencies, remove each one from the
support flap after it exits the machine.
Support Flap
with Extension
11 - 4 USING THE MACHINE AS A PRINTER
Printing on plain paper
The MP tray
1
2
3
4
Select the Paper Size, Media Type, Paper Source, and other
settings in the printer driver.
Media Type: Plain Paper
Paper Source: MP Tray
Open the MP tray and lower it gently.
Pull out the MP tray support flap.
When loading paper in the MP tray, make sure it touches the
back of the tray.
Paper-guide
Release Lever
Make sure that the paper is straight and in the proper position
on the MP tray. If it is not, the paper may not be fed properly,
resulting in a skewed printout or a paper jam.
5
While pressing the paper-guide release lever, slide the paper
guide to fit the paper size.
When you put paper in the MP tray, please remember the
following:
■ The side to be printed on must be face up.
■ During printing, the inside tray rises to feed paper into the
machine.
■ Put the leading edge (top of the paper) in first and push it
gently into the tray.
6
Send the print data to the machine.
USING THE MACHINE AS A PRINTER 11 - 5
Printing on thicker paper and card stock
When the back output tray is pulled down, the machine has a straight
paper path from the MP tray through to the back of the machine. Use
this paper feed and output method when you want to print on thicker
paper or card stock.
The multi-purpose tray (MP tray)
1
2
3
4
5
Select the Paper Size, Media Type, Paper Source, and other
settings in the printer driver.
Media Type: Thick paper or Thicker paper
Paper Source: MP Tray
Open the back output tray, and then pull out the face-up output
tray support if necessary.
Open the MP tray and lower it gently.
Pull out the MP tray support flap.
When putting paper in the MP tray, make sure it touches the
back of the tray.
Make sure that the paper is straight and in the proper position in
the MP tray. If it is not, the paper may not be fed properly,
resulting in a skewed printout or a paper jam.
11 - 6 USING THE MACHINE AS A PRINTER
6
While pressing the paper-guide release lever, slide the paper
guide to fit the paper size.
When you put paper in the MP tray, please remember the
following;
■ During printing, the inside tray rises to feed paper into the
machine.
■ The side to be printed on must be face up.
■ Put the leading edge (top of the paper) in first and push it
gently into the tray.
7
8
Send the print data to the machine.
When you have finished the print job, close the back output tray.
Caution
Remove each sheet immediately after printing. Stacking the sheets
may cause a paper jam or the paper to curl.
USING THE MACHINE AS A PRINTER 11 - 7
Printing on envelopes
To print on envelopes use multi-purpose tray.
All sides should be properly folded without any wrinkles or
creases.
1
2
3
4
Select the Paper Size, Media Type, Paper Source, and other
settings in the printer driver.
Media Type: Envelope, Env.thin or Env.thick
Open the back output tray, and then unfold the face-up output
tray support if necessary.
Open the MP tray and lower it gently.
Pull out the MP tray support flap.
If envelopes are creased after they have been printed:
At the back of the machine, open the back output tray and push
down the blue tabs at the left and right hand sides (as shown in
the figure on the next page). When you have finished printing
your envelopes, close the back output tray to reset the two blue
tabs back to their original position.
11 - 8 USING THE MACHINE AS A PRINTER
5
Put the envelopes in the MP tray so that they touch the back of
the tray. Do not put more than 3 envelopes in the MP tray at any
one time, or it may cause a jam.
Make sure that the envelopes are neatly stacked and in the
proper position in the MP tray. If they are not, the envelopes may
not be fed properly, resulting in a skewed printout or a jam.
USING THE MACHINE AS A PRINTER 11 - 9
6
Press and slide the paper-width guide to fit the envelope size.
When you put envelopes in the MP tray, please remember the
following;
■ During printing, the inside tray rises to feed envelopes into
the machine.
■ The side to be printed on must be face up.
■ Put the leading edge (top of the envelope) in first and push
it gently into the tray.
7
8
Send the print data to the machine.
After you finish the print job, close the back output tray.
11 - 10 USING THE MACHINE AS A PRINTER
Printer operation keys
Job Cancel
You can clear data from the memory.
Secure key
Secured data is password protected. Only those people that know
the password will be able to print the data. The machine will not print
secure data until the password is entered. After the document is
printed, the data will be cleared from the memory. To use this
function, you need to set your password in the printer driver dialog
box. (See Device Options on page 12-11.)
The Secure Key function is not available when using the ix2700
BR-Script driver.
1
Press Secure.
The LCD displays No Data! if there is no secured data in the
memory.
2
3
Press
or
to select the
user name.
Press Enter . The LCD displays
job selections.
Press
or
to select the
job.
Press Enter . The LCD prompts
you to enter your four-digit
password.
Secure Print
User?
▲
MIKE
▼
ANDY
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Secure Print
Job?
▲ Test1
▼ Test2
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
USING THE MACHINE AS A PRINTER 11 - 11
4
5
Enter your password using the
Secure Print
Test1
control panel.
Press Enter.
Password:XXXX
Set & Enter
Press
or
to select
Print.
Press Enter. The machine prints the data.
—OR—
If you want to delete the secured data press
or
to
select Delete.
Press Stop.
■ If you turn the power switch Off, the secured data saved in
memory will be cleared.
■ After you print the secured data it will be cleared from
memory.
Setting the Emulation Selection
This machine has an Automatic Emulation Selection function. When
the machine receives information from the PC, it automatically
chooses the emulation mode. This function has been set at the
factory to AUTO.
You can change the default emulation mode manually by using the
control panel.
1 Press Menu, 4, 1.
41.Emulation
▲
Auto
or
to select Auto,
2 Press
HP LaserJet
HP LaserJet or BR-Script3.
▼
BR-Script 3
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Press Enter.
3 Press Stop.
Try this function with your application software or network
server. If the function does not work properly, either select the
required emulation mode manually using the machine panel
buttons or use the emulation selection commands in your
software.
11 - 12 USING THE MACHINE AS A PRINTER
Printing the Internal Font List
You can print a list of the machine’s internal (or resident) fonts to see
how each font looks before you select it.
1 Press Menu, 4, 2, 1.
42.Print Options
1.Internal Font
2 Press Start . The machine prints
the list.
Press Start
3 Press Stop .
Printing the Print Configuration List
You can print a list of current printer settings.
1 Press Menu, 4, 2, 2.
42.Print Options
2.Configuration
2 Press Start . The machine prints
the settings.
Press Start
3 Press Stop .
Restoring factory default settings
You can return the machine to the original factory settings. Fonts and
macros in the temporary settings are cleared.
1 Press Menu, 4, 3.
43.Reset Printer
2 Press 1 to restore the factory
▲
1.Reset
settings
▼
2.Exit
Set
▲
▼ & Enter
—OR—
Press 2 to exit without making a change.
3 Press Stop .
Only the printer settings will be returned to the original factory
settings.
USING THE MACHINE AS A PRINTER 11 - 13
12 Printer driver settings
(Windows ® Only)
Printer driver settings
You can change the following printer settings when you print from
your computer:
■ Media Type
■ Multiple Page
■ Duplex
■ Watermark*1*2
■ Scaling*2
■ Print Date & Time*1*2
■ Quick Print Setup*1*2
■ Secure Print*1
*1 These settings are not available with the BR-script driver.
*2 These settings are not available with the Universal printer driver.
How to access the printer driver settings
1
2
Select Print from the File menu in your application software.
Select Imagistics ix2700 (USB) Printer as your printer and
click Preferences for Windows® 2000/XP (Properties for
Windows®95/98/98SE and Me, Document Defaults for
Windows NT® 4.0). The Printing Preferences dialog box will
appear.
The way you access the printer driver settings depends on your
operating system and software applications.
The screens shown in this section are from Windows® XP.
The screens on your Computer may vary depending on your
Windows Operating System.
PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS 12 - 1
Features in the Native Driver
The Native driver includes more features than the Microsoft®
Windows® Universal printer driver.
Basic tab
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Select the Paper Size, Multiple Page, Border Line (if any) and
Orientation.
Select number of Copies and Media Type.
Select Paper Source (First Page and Other Pages).
Auto Select allows the printer driver to select a suitable tray for
Paper Size automatically.
You can set the paper size for each tray in the Accessories tab.
(See Accessories tab on page 12-15.)
To return to the default settings, click the Default button.
12 - 2 PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS
Paper Size
From the drop-down box select the Paper Size you are using.
Multiple Page
The Multiple Page selection can reduce the image size of a page
allowing multiple pages to be printed on one sheet of paper or
enlarging the image size for printing one page on multiple sheets of
paper.
Ex. 4 in 1
Ex. 1 in 2 × 2 pages
Border Line
When printing multiple pages on one sheet with the Multiple Page
feature you can select to have a solid border, dash border or no
border around each page on the sheet.
Orientation
Orientation selects the position of how your document will be printed
(Portrait or Landscape).
Portrait
Landscape
PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS 12 - 3
Copies
The copies selection sets the number of copies that will be printed.
Collate
With the Collate check box selected, one complete copy of your
document will be printed and then repeated for the number of copies
you selected. If the Collate check box is not selected, then each
page will be printed for all the copies selected before the next page
of the document is printed.
Collate box checked
Collate box not checked
Media Type
You can use the following types of media in your machine. For the
best print quality, select the type of media that you wish to use.
Plain Paper
Thin Paper
Thick Paper
Thicker Paper
Bond Paper
Transparencies
Envelopes
Env. Thick
Env. Thin
When using ordinary plain paper (19 to 25 lb), select Plain
Paper. When using heavier weight paper, envelopes or rough
paper select Thick Paper or Thicker Paper. For bond paper,
select Bond Paper, for OHP transparencies, select
Transparencies. When you use envelopes, select Envelopes.
If the toner is not fixed to the envelope correctly when Envelopes
has been selected, select Env. Thick. If the envelope is
crumpled when Envelopes has been selected, select Env. Thin.
12 - 4 PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS
Advanced tab
1
2
3
4
5
To return to the default settings, click the Default button.
Change the tab settings by selecting one of the following icons:
1 Print Quality
2 Duplex
3 Watermark
4 Page Setting
5 Device Options
Print Quality
Resolution
You can change the resolution as follows:
■ HQ 1200
■ 600 dpi
■ 300 dpi
When you select Use Duplex Unit, HQ1200 is not available.
PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS 12 - 5
Toner Save Mode
You can save running costs by turning on the Toner Save Mode,
which reduces the print density.
Print Setting
For Windows® 95/98/98SE/Me
Print Setting is used for optimizing your print quality for the type of
original being printed (Photos, Graphics or Scanned Images). When
you choose Auto (Recommended), the printer automatically prints
with the most suitable print settings.
With the Print Setting set to Manual, you can change the Brightness,
Contrast and Graphics Quality options manually.
For Windows® 2000/XP/NT® WS 4.0
■ Check Use Printer Halftone to print using Halftone.
■ Check Use System Halftone to print using Halftone of the
system. To change the setting, press Setting.
■ If the halftone cannot be printed correctly, check Improve gray
printing.
12 - 6 PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS
Duplex Printing
Choosing the Duplex Printing icon displays the Duplex features
available.
Use Duplex Unit
Check the Duplex box and then select Use Duplex Unit. In this
mode the machine prints on both sides of the paper automatically.
Manual Duplex
Check the Duplex box and then select Manual Duplex. In this mode,
the machine prints all the even numbered pages first. Then the
printer driver stops and shows the instructions required to re-install
the paper. When you click OK the odd numbered pages are printed.
Duplex Type
You can select Duplex Type. There are six types of duplex
directions available for each orientation.
Flip on Left Edge
Flip on Right Edge
Flip on Top Edge
Flip on Bottom Edge
Flip on Top Edge (No Reverse)
Flip on Bottom Edge (No Reverse)
PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS 12 - 7
Binding Offset
Check the Binding Offset option, you can specify the offset value of
the binding side in inches or millimeters (0 - 8 inches) [0 - 203.2 mm].
Watermark
You can place a logo or text into your document as a Watermark.
You can select one of the preset Watermarks, or you can use a
bitmap file or text file that you have created.
Check Use Watermark, and then select the watermark you want to
use.
In background
Check In background to print the watermark image in the
background of your document. If this feature is not checked then the
Watermark will be printed on top of your document.
In Outline Text
(Window® 2000 Professional/XP/NT® WS 4.0 Only)
Check In Outline Text if you only want to print an outline of the watermark.
12 - 8 PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS
Print Watermark
The Print Watermark feature offers the following print choices:
■ On all pages
■ On first page only
■ From second page
■ Custom
■ Apply from second copy (collate only)
(For Windows® 2000/XP/Windows NT® 4.0)
Watermark Setting
You can change the Watermark’s size and position on the page by
selecting the Watermark, and clicking the Edit button. If you want to
add a new Watermark, click the New button, and then select Text or
Bitmap in the Watermark Style.
■ Title
You can select the CONFIDENTIAL, COPY or DRAFT as the
standard title or enter a title you like in the field.
■ Watermark Text
Enter your Watermark text into the Text Box, and then select the
Font, Size, Darkness and Style.
■ Watermark Bitmap
Enter the file name and location of your bitmap image in the File
box, or Browse for the file location. You can also set the scaling
size of the image.
PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS 12 - 9
■ Position
This setting offers you the control for where the Watermark is to
be positioned on the page.
Page Setting
You can change the print size of your document with the Scaling
feature.
■ Check Off if you want to print the document as it appears on your
screen.
■ Check Fit to Paper Size, if your document has an unusual size,
or if you have only the standard size paper.
■ Check the Free box if you want to manually reduce or enlarge the
output.
■ You can also use the Mirror Print or Reverse Print feature for
your page setting.
12 - 10 PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS
Device Options
Lets you set the following Printer Functions:
Secure Print
Secure documents are documents that are password protected
when they are sent to the machine. Only the people who know the
password will be able to print them. Since the documents are
secured at the machine, you must use the control panel of the
machine (with the password) to print them.
To send a secured document:
1
Select Secure Print from Printer Function and check Secure
Print.
2 Enter your password, user name and job name and click OK.
3 You must print the secured documents from the control panel of
the machine. (See Secure key on page 11-11.)
To delete a secured document:
You need to use the control panel of the machine to delete a
secured document. (See Secure key on page 11-11.)
You can store up to 8 MB of secured data in the machine's
memory.
PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS 12 - 11
Quick Print Setup
The Quick Print Setup feature allows you to quickly select driver
settings. To view setting, simply click your mouse button on the task
tray
icon. This feature can be set to ON or OFF from the Device
Options section.
The factory setting is OFF.
12 - 12 PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS
Administrator (For Windows® 95/98/98SE/Me Users Only)
The administrator selection permits the Copy, Scaling and
Watermark features to be locked and password protected.
Record your password and keep it in a safe place for future
reference. If you forget your password these settings can not be
accessed.
PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS 12 - 13
Print Date & Time
When enabled the Print Date and Time feature will automatically
print the date and time from your computers system clock on your
document.
Click the Setting button to change the Date and Time Format. You
can change the Font by clicking the Font button or the Position. To
include a background with the Date and Time select Opaque. When
Opaque is selected you can set the Darkness of the Date and Time
background by changing the percentage.
The Date and Time indicated in the selection box represents the
format that will be printed. The actual Date and Time printed on
your document is automatically retrieved from the settings of
your computer.
12 - 14 PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS
Accessories tab
The Accessories Tab includes the settings for configuring the
printer driver for the size of paper loaded in each paper source. This
tab also installs any additional options into the driver settings.
Paper Source Setting
To configure the paper size for each paper source, highlight the source in
the Paper Source Setting list. Select the Paper Size from the pull-down
box and click Update. When Auto Select (default Paper Source) is set in
the Basic tab of the printer driver (see Basic tab on page 12-2), the printer
driver will automatically use the Paper Source setting to select a tray
which matches the Paper Size setting in the printer driver.
Default Source
The Default Source allows you to choose the paper source that will
be used when the paper size of the document being sent does not
match the Paper Source settings.
Available Options
In order to access the optional 2nd
paper tray the option must be
installed in the driver. Highlight the
model number from the Available
Options list and click Add. The
optional tray will then be listed in the
Installed box, Paper Source Setting
list and the screen illustration will
display the 2nd tray.
PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS 12 - 15
Features in the PS printer driver
(For Windows®)
The Windows® 95/98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional/XP and Windows
NT® 4.0 utilizes BR-Script 3(PostScript ® 3 language emulation) driver.
To install the PS driver
If you have already installed the printer driver following the instruction
in the Quick Setup Guide, insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive
on your PC and click Install Software. Choose Multi-Function
Suite and follow the on-screen instructions. When the Select
Components screen appears, check PS Printer Driver, and then
continue following the on-screen instructions.
If you have not previously installed the driver and software, insert the
CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive on your PC and click Install
Software. Choose Multi-Function Suite and follow the on-screen
instructions. When the Setup Type screen appears, select Custom
and check the PS Printer Driver. Then continue following on-screen
instructions.
The screens in this section are from Windows® XP.
The screens on your PC will vary depending on your Operating System.
Ports tab
Select the port where your printer is connected or the path to the
network printer you are using.
12 - 16 PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS
Device Settings tab
Select the options you installed.
PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS 12 - 17
Layout tab
If you are using Windows NT® 4.0, Windows ® 2000 or XP, you
can access the Layout tab by clicking Printing Preferences...
in the General tab of the Imagistics ix2700 BR-Script3
Properties screen.
You can change the Layout setting by selecting the setting in the
Orientation, Page Order and Page Per Sheet.
Booklet (For Windows® 2000/XP)
You can print a booklet by selecting Booklet from Pages Per Sheet
list.
12 - 18 PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS
Paper / Quality tab
Select the Paper Source.
PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS 12 - 19
Advanced Options
If you are using Windows NT® 4.0, Windows® 2000 or XP, you
can access the Imagistics ix2700 BR-Script3 Advanced
Options tab by clicking Advanced... button in the Layout tab or
the Paper/Quality tab.
1
2
3
1
2
3
Select the Paper Size and Copy Count.
Set the Print Quality, Scaling and TrueType Font setting.
You can change settings by selecting the setting in the Printer
Features list:
■ Media Type
■ Toner Save
■ BR-Script Level
12 - 20 PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS
to scan using
13 How
Windows
®
The scanning operations and drivers will be different depending
on your operating system.
For Windows® 95/98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional and
Windows NT® Workstation 4.0
The machine uses a TWAIN Compliant driver for scanning
documents from your applications. (See Scanning a document,
TWAIN compliant on page 13-1.)
For Windows® XP
The machine uses Windows® Imaging Acquisition (WIA) for
scanning documents. (See Scanning a document (For
Windows® XP only) on page 13-10.)
For ScanSoft®, PaperPort® and TextBridge® OCR
Go to Using ScanSoft® PaperPort® and TextBridge® OCR on
page 13-19.
Scanning a document
TWAIN compliant
The Multi-Function Suite software includes a TWAIN compliant
scanner driver. TWAIN drivers meet the standard universal protocol
for communicating between scanners and software applications.
This means that not only can you scan images directly into the
PaperPort® viewer, but you can also scan images directly into
hundreds of other software applications that support TWAIN
scanning. These applications include popular programs like Adobe®
Photoshop®, Adobe ® PageMaker®, CorelDraw® and many more.
HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS® 13 - 1
How to access the Scanner
1
Open the software application (ScanSoft® PaperPort®) to scan
a document.
The instructions for scanning in this Guide are for when you use
ScanSoft® PaperPort® 8.0SE.
2
3
4
Select Scan from the File drop-down menu or select the Scan
button. The Scan pane appears in the left panel.
Select Imagistics ix2700 from the Scanner drop-down list box.
Click Scan.
If the machine is connected via:
Parallel - use 'Imagistics ix2700'
USB - use 'Imagistics ix2700 USB'
LAN - use 'Imagistics ix2700 LAN'
The Imagistics ix2700 Scanner Setup dialog box will appear:
13 - 2 HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS ®
Scanning a document into the PC
You can scan a whole page
—OR—
Scan a portion of the page after pre-scanning the document.
Scanning a whole page
1
2
Place the original face up in the ADF (automatic document
feeder), or face down on the scanner glass.
Adjust the following settings, if required, in the Scanner window:
■ Image Type
■ Resolution
■ Scan Type
■ Brightness
■ Contrast
■ Document Size
After you select a document size, you can adjust the scanning
area further by clicking the left mouse button and dragging it.
This is required when you want to crop an image when
scanning.
3
See Settings in the Scanner window on page 13-6.
Click the Start button in the scanner window.
When scanning is completed, click Cancel to return to the
PaperPort® window.
HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS® 13 - 3
PreScanning to crop a portion you want to scan
The Pre-Scan button is used to preview an image for cropping any
unwanted areas from the image. When you are satisfied with the
preview, click the Start button in the scanner window to scan the image.
1 Place the original face up in the ADF, or face down on the
scanner glass.
Scanning area
2
3
Select the settings for Image Type (Photo, Web or Text),
Resolution, Scan Type, Brightness and Contrast, as needed.
In the Imagistic ix2700 Scanner Setup dialog box, click the
PreScan button.
The entire original will be scanned into the PC and will appear in
the Scanning Area.
Scanning area
4
Select the portion you want to scan by clicking the left mouse
button and dragging it.
13 - 4 HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS ®
5
6
7
You can enlarge the portion you selected by pressing
to
check it. If you want to select the different portion, use
undo the image.
to
Place the original face up in the ADF again, if you used the ADF
in Step 1.
Click Start.
This time only the selected area of the original will appear in the
PaperPort® window (or your software application window).
In the PaperPort® window, use the options available to refine the
image.
HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS® 13 - 5
Settings in the Scanner window
Image Type
Select the image type of output from Photo, Web or Text.
Resolution and Scan Type will be altered for each default setting.
The default settings are:
Image Type
Resolution
Scan Type
Photo
Select for scanning photo images.
300 x 300 dpi
24-bit color
Web
Select for attaching the scanned
image to web pages.
100 x 100 dpi
24-bit color
Text
Select for scanning text
documents.
200 x 200 dpi
Black & White
Resolution
You can change the scanning resolution from the Resolution drop
down list. Higher resolutions take more memory and transfer time,
but can achieve a finer scanned image. The following table shows
the resolution you can choose and the available colors.
Resolution
Black & White /
Gray
(Error Diffusion)
256 color
True Gray /
24 bit color /
24 bit color (Fast)
100 × 100 dpi
Yes
Yes
Yes
150 × 150 dpi
Yes
Yes
Yes
200 × 200 dpi
Yes
Yes
Yes
300 × 300 dpi
Yes
Yes
Yes
400 × 400 dpi
Yes
Yes
Yes
600 × 600 dpi
Yes
Yes
Yes
1200 × 1200 dpi
Yes
No
Yes
2400 × 2400 dpi
Yes
No
Yes
4800 × 4800 dpi
Yes
No
Yes
9600 × 9600 dpi
Yes
No
Yes
13 - 6 HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS ®
Scan Type
Black & White: Set the Scan Type to Black & White for text or line art.
Gray Scale:
Set the Scan Type to Gray or True Gray for
photographic images.
Colors:
Set either:
256 Color, which scans up to 256 colors, or 24-bit
color which scans up to 16.8 million colors, or
24-bit color (Fast) which does not use Color
Matching and is faster than 24-bit color.
Although using 24-bit color creates an image with
the most accurate colors, the image file will be
approximately three times larger than a file
created with 256 Color.
Brightness
Adjust this settings (-50 to 50) to obtain the best image. The default
value is 0, representing an ‘average’.
You can set the level by dragging the slide bar to the right or left to
lighten or darken the image. You can also type a value in the box for
the setting.
If the scanned image is too light, set a lower brightness value and
scan the document again. If the image is too dark, set a higher
brightness value and scan the document again.
Contrast
This setting is adjustable only when you have selected one of the
gray scale settings. It is not available when Black & White and Color
settings are selected as the Scan Type.
You can increase or decrease the contrast level by moving the slide
bar to the left or right. An increase emphasizes dark and light areas
of the Image, while a decrease reveals more detail in gray areas. You
can also type a value in the box for the setting.
HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS® 13 - 7
Document Size
Set the Size to one of the following:
■ Letter (8 1/2 × 11 in.)
■ A4 (210 × 297 mm)
■ Legal (8 1/2 × 14 in.)
■ A5 (148 × 210 mm)
■ B5 (182 × 257 mm)
■ Executive (7 1/4 × 10 1/2 in.)
■ Business Card (90 × 60 mm)
■ Photo 3.5 × 5 in. (9 × 13cm)
■ Photo 5 × 7 in. (13 × 18cm)
■ APS C 4 × 6 in. (10 × 15cm)
■ Custom (User adjustable from 0.35 × 0.35 in. to 8.5 × 14 in. or 8.9
× 8.9 mm to 215.9 × 355.6 mm)
To scan photographs or business cards, select the document size,
and then place the document face down at the center of scanner glass.
When scanning photographs or other images for use in a word processor
or other graphics application. You should try different settings for the
contrast and resolution modes to see which best suits your needs.
If you selected Custom as the size, The Custom Document Size
dialog box will appear.
Type the Name, Width and Height for the document.
You can choose “mm” or “inch” as the unit for Width and Height.
13 - 8 HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS ®
You can see the actual paper size you selected on the screen.
■ Width: shows the width of scanning area
■ Height: shows the height of scanning area
■ Data Size: shows the approximate data size calculated in a
Bitmap format. The size will be different for other file formats such
as JPEG.
HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS® 13 - 9
Scanning a document
(For Windows® XP only)
WIA compliant
Windows® XP uses Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) for scanning
images from the machine. You can scan images directly into the
PaperPort® viewer or you can scan images directly into any other
software application that supports WIA or TWAIN scanning.
How to access the scanner
1
Open your software application to scan a document.
The instructions for scanning in this Guide are for when you use
ScanSoft® PaperPort ® 8.0. The steps for scanning from another
application may vary.
2
Select Scan from the File drop-down menu or select the Scan
button.
The Scan pane appears in the left panel.
Select the scanner you are using from the Scanner drop-down
list box.
Click Scan.
The Scan dialog box will appear:
3
4
13 - 10 HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS ®
Scanning a document into the PC
If you want to scan a whole page, use the ADF (automatic document
feeder).
—OR—
If you want to scan a portion of the page after pre-scanning the
document, use the scanner glass (Flatbed).
Scanning a document using the ADF
1
Place the original face up in the ADF (automatic document feeder).
A
B
C
D
2
3
4
5
Select the Document Feeder from the Paper source
drop-down list box (A).
Select the picture type (B).
Select the Paper size from the drop-down list box (D).
If you require advanced settings, click Adjust the quality of the
scanned picture (C). You can select Brightness, Contrast,
Resolution and Picture type from the Advanced Properties.
Click the OK button after you choose your settings.
HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS® 13 - 11
■ The scanner resolution you can select is up to 1200 × 1200
dpi.
■ For resolutions greater than 1200 dpi, use the Scanner
Utility. (See Scanner Utility on page 13-15.)
6
To start scanning your document, click the Scan button in the
Scan dialog box.
13 - 12 HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS ®
PreScanning to crop a portion you want to scan using the
scanner glass
The Preview button is used to preview an image for cropping any
unwanted portions from the image. When you are satisfied with the
preview, click the Scan button from the scanner window to scan the
image.
1 Place the original face down on the scanner glass.
2 Make sure you selected Flatbed in the Paper source pull-down
box (A).
A
Scanning area
B
3
Select the picture type (B).
HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS® 13 - 13
4
5
In the Scan dialog box, click the Preview button. The entire
original will be scanned into the PC and will appear in the
scanning area.
Select the portion you want to scan by clicking the left mouse
button and dragging it over the area.
Scanning area
6
If you require advanced settings, click Picture Type from the
Adjust the quality of the scanned picture (C). You can select
Brightness, Contrast, Resolution and Advanced Properties.
Click the OK button after you choose your settings.
C
13 - 14 HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS ®
7
To start scanning your document, click the Scan button in the
Scan dialog box.
This time only the selected area of the original will appear in the
PaperPort® window (or your software application window).
Scanner Utility
The Scanner Utility is used for configuring the scanner driver for
resolutions greater than 1200dpi and for changing the paper size. If
you want to set Legal size as the default size, change the setting
using this utility. You must restart your PC for the new settings to take
effect.
To run the utility:
You can run the utility by selecting the Scanner Utility located in the
Start/All Programs/Imagistics/Multi-Function Suite menu.
Scanning at resolutions greater than 1200dpi may cause
problems with some scanning applications.
HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS® 13 - 15
Using the scan key (For USB or
Parallel interface cable users)
You can use
(Scan) on the control panel to scan originals
into your word processing, graphics or E-mail applications or your
computer folder. The advantage of using
(Scan) is that you
avoid the mouse clicks required to scan from your computer.
For Scan to E-mail, Scan to Image, Scan to OCR and Scan
to File
Before you can use
(Scan) on the control panel, you
must have connected the machine to your Windows® based
computer and loaded the appropriate Drivers for your version of
Windows®.
When you are ready to use
(Scan), make sure the
SmartUI application is running on your computer. For details
about how to configure the SmartUI buttons to launch the
application of your choice using
(Scan), go to the
appropriate chapter:
■ For Windows® 95/98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional and
Windows NT® WS 4.0, see Using the SmartUI for Windows®
95/98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional and Windows NT® WS
4.0 on page 14-1.
■ For Windows® XP, see Using the Windows®-Based SmartUI
on page 15-1.
■ If your machine is connected with both a USB and a Parallel
cable, you need to select USB or Parallel as the destination
in each step.
13 - 16 HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS ®
Scan to E-mail
You can either scan a black and white or color original into your
E-mail application as a file attachment. You can change the
(Scan) configuration. (See Scan to E-mail on page 14-10 to 14-11.)
(For Windows® XP: See Hardware Section: Changing the Scan to
button configuration on page 15-5 to 15-11.)
1 Place the original face up in the ADF, or face down on the
scanner glass.
2
3
Press
▲
Scan to
Scan to
Scan to
▼ Scan to
Set ▲ ▼ &
(Scan).
E-mail
Image
OCR
File
Enter
Press
or
to select Scan
to E-mail.
Press Enter .
The machine will scan the original, create a file attachment, and
launch your E-mail application, displaying the new message
waiting to be addressed.
Scan to Image
You can scan a color picture into your graphics application for
(Scan)
viewing and editing. You can change the
configuration. (See Scan to Image on page 14-14.) (For Windows®
XP: See Hardware Section: Changing the Scan to button
configuration on page 15-5 to 15-11.)
1 Place the original face up in the ADF, or face down on the
scanner glass.
2
3
Press
(Scan).
▲
Scan to
Scan to
Scan to
▼ Scan to
Set ▲ ▼ &
Press
or
to select Scan
to Image.
Press Enter .
The machine will start the scanning process.
E-mail
Image
OCR
File
Enter
HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS® 13 - 17
Scan to OCR
If your original is text, you can have it converted by ScanSoft®
TextBridge® to an editable text file and then have the result displayed
in your word processing application for viewing and editing. You can
change the
(Scan) configuration. (See Scan to OCR (Word
Processor) on page 14-12 to 14-13.) (For Windows® XP: See
Hardware Section: Changing the Scan to button configuration on
page 15-5 to 15-11.)
1 Place the original face up in the ADF, or face down on the
scanner glass.
2
3
Press
(Scan).
▲
Scan to
Scan to
Scan to
▼ Scan to
Set ▲ ▼ &
Press
or
to select Scan
to OCR.
Press Enter.
The machine will start the scanning process.
E-mail
Image
OCR
File
Enter
Scan to File
You can scan a black and white or a color original into your computer
and save it as a file in the folder you choose. The file type and
specific folder are based on the settings you have chosen in the Scan
to File screen of the SmartUI. (See Scan to File on page 14-8 to
14-9.) (For Windows ® XP: See Hardware Section: Changing the
Scan to button configuration on page 15-5 to 15-11.)
1 Place the original face up in the ADF, or face down on the
scanner glass.
▲
Scan to
Scan to
Scan to
▼ Scan to
Set ▲ ▼ &
2
3
Press
4
The machine will start the scanning process.
Press
or
to File.
Press Enter.
(Scan).
to select Scan
13 - 18 HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS ®
E-mail
Image
OCR
File
Enter
Using ScanSoft® PaperPort® and
TextBridge® OCR
ScanSoft® PaperPort ® is a document management application. You
will use PaperPort® to view scanned documents.
PaperPort® has a sophisticated, yet easy-to-use, filing system that
will help you organize your graphics and text documents. It allows
you to combine or “stack” documents of different formats for printing,
faxing or filing.
ScanSoft® PaperPort® can be accessed through the ScanSoft®
PaperPort® program group.
See Documentation for ScanSoft® PaperPort ®on the CD-ROM.
The complete ScanSoft® PaperPort® Users Guide, including
ScanSoft® TextBridge ® OCR, is in the documentation on the
CD-ROM.
This chapter is only an introduction to the basic operations.
When you install Multi-Function Suite, ScanSoft® PaperPort® and
ScanSoft® TextBridge ® OCR are installed with it automatically.
If you are using Windows® XP, Windows NT® 4.0 or Windows®
2000 Professional, we recommend that you are logged on with
administrator rights.
HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS® 13 - 19
Viewing items
ScanSoft® PaperPort® provides several ways to view items:
Desktop View displays a thumbnail (a small graphic that represents
each item in a Desktop or folder).
Items in the selected folder appear on the PaperPort® Desktop. You
can see PaperPort® items (MAX files) and non-PaperPort® items
(files created using other applications).
Non-PaperPort® items include an icon that indicates the application
that was used to create the item; a non-PaperPort® item is represented
by a small rectangular thumbnail and not an actual image.
Desktop View displays items
as thumbnails
Page View displays a close-up of a single page and you can open a
PaperPort® item by double-clicking on it.
As long as you have the appropriate application on your computer to
display it, you can also double-click a non-PaperPort® item to open it.
Page View displays each item
as a full page
13 - 20 HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS ®
Organizing your items in folders
PaperPort® has an easy-to-use filing system for organizing your
items. The filing system consists of folders and items that you select
to view in Desktop View. An item can be a PaperPort® item or a
non-PaperPort® item:
■ Folders are arranged in a “tree” structure in the Folder View.
You use this section to select folders and view their items in
Desktop View.
■ You can simply drag and drop an item onto a folder.
When the folder is highlighted, release the mouse button and the
item is stored in that folder.
■ Folders can be “nested”—that is, stored in other folders.
■ When you double-click a folder, its items (both PaperPort® MAX
files and non paperport® files) appear on the Desktop.
■ You can also use Windows® Explorer to manage the folders
and items shown in Desktop View.
Quick links to other applications
ScanSoft® PaperPort® automatically recognizes many other
applications on your computer and creates a “working link” to them.
The Send To Bar at the bottom of the Desktop view shows icons of
those linked applications.
To use a link, drag an item onto one of the icons to start the
application represented by the icon. A typical use of the Send To Bar
is to select an item and then fax it.
This sample Send To Bar shows several applications with links to
PaperPort®.
If PaperPort® does not automatically recognize one of the
applications on your computer, you can manually create a link using
the Add to Send To Bar... command.
(See PaperPort® in the Documentation section on the CD-ROM for
more information about creating new links.)
HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS® 13 - 21
ScanSoft® TextBridge® OCR lets you convert
image text into text you can edit
Software by:
ScanSoft® TextBridge® OCR is installed automatically with
PaperPort® when you install Multi-Function Suite on your computer.
ScanSoft® PaperPort® can quickly convert the text on a ScanSoft®
PaperPort® item (which is really just a picture of the text) into text that
you can edit with a word processing application.
PaperPort® uses the optical character recognition application
ScanSoft® TextBridge®, which comes with PaperPort®
—OR—
PaperPort® can use your preferred OCR application if it is already on
your computer. You can convert the entire item, or by using the Copy
Text command, you can select only a portion of the text to convert.
Dragging an item onto a word-processing link icon starts
PaperPort® ’s built-in OCR application, or you can use your own
OCR application.
You can Import items from other applications
In addition to scanning items, you can bring items into PaperPort® in
a variety of ways and convert them to PaperPort® (MAX) files in
several different ways:
■ Print to the Desktop View from another application, such as
Microsoft® Excel.
■ Import files saved in other file formats, such as Windows® Bitmap
(BMP) or Tag Image File Format (TIFF).
13 - 22 HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS ®
You can Export items in other formats
You can export or save PaperPort® items in several popular file
formats, such as BMP, JPEG, TIFF, or self-viewing.
For example, to create a file for an Internet Web site, export it as a
JPEG file. Web pages often use JPEG files for displaying images.
Exporting an image file
1
2
3
4
Select the Save As command from the File pull-down menu in
the PaperPort® window. The Save ‘XXXXX’ as dialog box will be
displayed.
Select the drive and directory where you want to store the file.
Enter the new file name and choose the file type or select a
name from the File Name text box. (You can scroll through the
Directories and File Name listing for prompting.)
Select the OK button to save your file, or Cancel to return to the
PaperPort® without saving it.
HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS® 13 - 23
How to Uninstall PaperPort® and ScanSoft®
TextBridge®
For Windows® 95/98/98SE, and Windows NT® Workstation 4.0 and
Windows® Me:
Select Start, Settings, Control Panel, Add/Remove Programs
and the Install/Uninstall tab.
Select SmartUI for Paperport and click the Add/Remove button.
Select PaperPort® 8.0 SE from the list and click the Add/Remove button.
For Windows® 2000 Professional:
Select Start, Settings, Control Panel and Add/Remove Programs.
Select SmartUI for Paperport and click the Change/Remove
button.
Select PaperPort® 8.0 SE from the list and click the Change button.
For Windows® XP:
Select Start, Control Panal, Add or Remove Programs and the
Change or Remove Programs icon.
Select PaperPort® 8.0 SE from the list and click the Change button.
13 - 24 HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS ®
14
Using the SmartUI for Windows®
95/98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional
and Windows NT® WS 4.0
If you are using Windows® 2000 Professional or Windows NT®
4.0, we recommend that you are logged on with administrator
rights.
SmartUI
The SmartUI is a software utility that pops up on the PC screen
whenever paper is put in the ADF of the machine. This allows you to
quickly and with very few mouse clicks, access the most frequently
used scanning applications. Using the SmartUI stops the need to
manually startup any specific applications.
The SmartUI provides three operations (Scan, Copy and PC-Fax):
■ Scan directly to a file, E-mail, word processor or graphic
application of your choice
■ Copy
■ PC Faxing using the PC-FAX software
USING THE SMARTUI FOR WINDOWS® 95/98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND WINDOWS NT® WS 4.0 14 - 1
AutoLoad the SmartUI
The SmartUI is loaded every time Windows® is started.
When the SmartUI is loaded, the SmartUI
icon will appear on
the task bar.
If you don’t want the SmartUI to load automatically, you can turn off
AutoLoad.
If the SmartUI
icon does not appear on your task bar, you
will have to launch the software.
Double-click the SmartUI
icon on the desktop or from the
Start menu, select Programs, ScanSoft PaperPort 8.0, and
then click SmartUI POPUP.
How to turn off AutoLoad
1
2
Left-click the SmartUI
icon and click Show.
When the SmartUI window appears, left click the Smart Click
button.
A dialog box will appear:
3
Uncheck the ‘AutoLoad’ Pop-Up check box.
14 - 2 USING THE SMARTUI FOR WINDOWS® 95/98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND WINDOWS NT® WS 4.0
SmartUI features
Auto Configuration
During installation the SmartUI will check your system to set up the
default applications for E-mail, word processing and the graphics
viewer/editor.
For example, if you are using Outlook as your default E-mail
application, the SmartUI will create a link and a scanning application
button for Outlook.
You can change a default application. Right-click the appropriate
SmartUI button to display Configurations and then click it. Select a
different application.
For example, you can change a scan button from MS Word Pad
to MS Word
that is listed for the Word Processor.
by changing the application
USING THE SMARTUI FOR WINDOWS® 95/98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND WINDOWS NT® WS 4.0 14 - 3
Scan key operations
Scan to File—Lets you scan directly to a file on your computer. You
can change the file type and directory for the document you are
scanning.
Scan to E-mail—Lets you scan a picture or text document directly
into an E-mail application as a standard attachment. You can choose
the file type and resolution for the attachment.
Scan to OCR (Word Processor)—Lets you scan a text document, run
ScanSoft TextBridge OCR, and insert the text original (not a graphic
image) into a word processing file. You can choose the word
processing application, such as Word Pad, MS Word, and so on.
Scan to Image—Lets you scan an image directly into any graphic
viewer/editor application. You can choose the graphics application,
such as Microsoft Paint.
Copy operations
Copy—Lets you use the PC and any Windows® printer driver for
enhanced copy operations.
You can scan the page on the ix2700 and print the copies using any
of the features of the ix2700 printer driver.
—OR—
You can send the copy output to any standard Windows® printer
driver that is on your PC.
PC-Fax operation
Send a Fax—Lets you scan a picture or text original and send the
image as a fax from the PC using the PC-FAX software.
14 - 4 USING THE SMARTUI FOR WINDOWS® 95/98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND WINDOWS NT® WS 4.0
Scanner settings for Scan, Copy and PC-Fax buttons
When the Pop-Up screen appears, you can access the Scanner
Settings window.
Click the Smart Click
icon at the top right of the SmartUI
screen.
—OR—
Click the Modify Settings button on any of the Configuration screens.
Global settings
AutoLoad Pop-Up—Select this checkbox if you want SmartUI to load
when you turn on your computer.
USING THE SMARTUI FOR WINDOWS® 95/98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND WINDOWS NT® WS 4.0 14 - 5
Setting up the scanner configurations
The Pop-Up application stores eight different scanning modes. Each
time you scan an original, you can choose the most appropriate
scanning mode from the following:
Faxing, Filing and Copying
Text for OCR
Photos
Photos (High Quality)
Photos (Quick Scan)
Custom
Draft Copy
Fine Copy
Each mode has its own set of stored settings. You can keep the
factory default settings or change them at any time:
Resolution—From the pull-down list, select the scanning
resolution you most often use.
Color Mode—From the pull-down list, select the color settings
you most often use.
Scan Size—From the pull-down list, select the scan size you
most often use.
Brightness—Slide the adjuster from 0% to 100%
Contrast—Slide the adjuster from 0% to 100%
Click OK to save your changes. If you make a mistake or want the
original default setting, just click the Restore Defaults button when
the scanning mode is displayed.
14 - 6 USING THE SMARTUI FOR WINDOWS® 95/98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND WINDOWS NT® WS 4.0
Perform an operation from the SmartUI screen
If you see this screen it means you left-clicked a button in the
SmartUI window without first placing an original in the ADF.
Place the original in the machine’s ADF, and then click OK to go to
the SmartUI screen.
If you want to scan the original from the scanner glass, please
use
(Scan) on the control panel of the machine.
USING THE SMARTUI FOR WINDOWS® 95/98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND WINDOWS NT® WS 4.0 14 - 7
Scan to File
To access Scan to File Configurations screen
1
2
3
Place the original face up in the ADF. The SmartUI screen will
pop up.
Right-click Scan to File and click on Configuration. Click the
Modify Settings button to view the configuration screen of the
SmartUI.
To save your settings, click OK
—OR—
To go back to the factory default settings, click the Restore
Defaults button.
Scanner settings
From the pull-down list, select the scanning mode that is appropriate
for the type of file: Faxing, Filing and Copying; Text for OCR;
Photos; Photos (High Quality); Photos (Quick Scan); Custom;
Draft Copy or Fine Copy.
To change any of the settings for the mode, click Modify Settings.
14 - 8 USING THE SMARTUI FOR WINDOWS® 95/98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND WINDOWS NT® WS 4.0
Destination folder
PaperPort Folder—Select this checkbox to scan the original into your
PaperPort folder.
Other Folder—Select this checkbox, to scan the original as another
file type or to store it in another directory/folder.
File—If you selected Other folder from the pull-down list, select the
type of file:
PaperPort Image Item (*.max)
PaperPort Self-Viewing (*.exe)
PaperPort Browser-Viewable (*.htm)
PaperPort 5.0 Image Item (*.max)
PaperPort 4.0 Image Item (*.max)
PaperPort 3.0 Image Item (*.max)
Windows Bitmap (*bmp)
PC Paintbrush (*.pcx)
PCX Multi-page (*.dcx)
JPEG (*.jpg)
TIFF-Uncompressed (*.tif)
TIFF-Group 4 (*.tif)
TIFF-Class F (*.tif)
TIFF Multi-page - Uncompressed (*.tif)
TIFF Multi-page - Group 4 (*.tif)
TIFF Multi-page - Class F (*.tif)
Portable Network Graphics (*.png)
FlashPix (*.fpx)
To Search your system for the directory and folder you want, click the
Browse button. Click OK to save your settings.
USING THE SMARTUI FOR WINDOWS® 95/98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND WINDOWS NT® WS 4.0 14 - 9
Scan to E-mail
To access Scan to E-mail Configurations screen
1
2
3
Place the original face up in the ADF. The SmartUI screen will
pop up.
Right-click the E-mail application button and click on
Configuration. Click the Modify Settings button to view the
configuration screen of the SmartUI.
To save your settings, click OK
—OR—
To go back to the factory default settings, click the Restore
Defaults button.
Scanner settings
From the pull-down list, select the scanning mode that is appropriate
for the type of file: Faxing, Filing and Copying; Text for OCR;
Photos; Photos (High Quality); Photos (Quick Scan); Custom;
Draft Copy or Fine Copy.
To change any of the settings for this mode, click Modify Settings.
14 - 10 USING THE SMARTUI FOR WINDOWS® 95/98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND WINDOWS NT® WS 4.0
E-mail application
E-mail Application—From the pull-down list, select your E-mail
application.
E-mail Settings—Click the E-Mail Settings button to set up links.
The Send To Options window will appear:
Send to Options
Convert attachments to specified file type—Converts items to the
type in the File Type box. Clear this check box to keep files in their
source format; for example, to keep Word documents in the .doc
format and JPEG images in the .jpg format.
All documents and image items—Converts all items regardless of
the program in which the item was created; for example, converts all
Word (doc) files and JPEG (.jpg) files to the file type.
PaperPort image items (max) only—Converts only PaperPort
image items (.max) files. PaperPort does not convert other file types,
such as JPEG images and Word documents.
File type—Identifies the format in which to convert items; for
example, JPEG or TIFF.
Combine items into single file, if possible—Combines all selected
items into a single file that contains multiple pages. This option is
available only when the file type supports multiple pages, such as
multi-page TIFF.
USING THE SMARTUI FOR WINDOWS® 95/98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND WINDOWS NT® WS 4.0 14 - 11
Scan to OCR (Word Processor)
To access Scan to OCR Configurations screen
1
Place the original face up in the ADF. The SmartUI screen will
pop up.
2 Right-click the word processor application button and click on
Configuration. Click the Modify Settings button to view the
configuration screen of the SmartUI.
To save your settings, click OK.
—OR—
To go back to the factory default settings, click the Restore Defaults
button.
Scanner settings
From the pull-down list, select the scanning mode that is appropriate
for the type of file: Faxing, Filing and Copying; Text for OCR;
Photos; Photos (High Quality); Photos (Quick Scan); Custom;
Draft Copy or Fine Copy.
To change any of the settings for this mode, click Modify Settings.
14 - 12 USING THE SMARTUI FOR WINDOWS® 95/98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND WINDOWS NT® WS 4.0
Word Processor
Word Processor—From the pull-down list, select the word processor
you want to use.
Click the Link Settings button to display the screen to set up the
document format you want to use and identify the OCR program:
File Type—From the pull-down list, select the file type you want to
use for your word processor or text documents.
OCR—Identify the OCR program to use to convert scanned
document images to editable documents. This option is available
only when you have an OCR program other than the one provided
with PaperPort. (PaperPort 8.0 uses the same OCR engine that is in
ScanSoft's TextBridge Pro Millennium product.)
Click the Settings button to choose how the OCR application will
read the pages that you scan into your word processor application.
The OCR Settings window will appear:
Select your setting and click OK.
■ Auto orient page—Click this checkbox to automatically rotate
pages so that the text is upright.
■ Single column output—Click this checkbox if you want to
remove columns from multi-column documents so that converted
text appears in a one-column format.
USING THE SMARTUI FOR WINDOWS® 95/98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND WINDOWS NT® WS 4.0 14 - 13
Scan to Image
To access Scan to Image Configurations screen
1
Place the original face up in the ADF. The SmartUI screen will
pop up.
2 Right-click the graphic application button and click on
Configuration. Click the Modify Settings button to view the
configuration screen of the SmartUI.
To save your settings, click OK.
—OR—
To go back to the factory default settings, click the Restore Defaults
button.
Scanner Settings
From the pull-down list, select the scanning mode that is appropriate
for the type of file: Faxing, Filing and Copying; Text for OCR;
Photos; Photos (High Quality); Photos (Quick Scan); Custom;
Draft Copy or Fine Copy.
To change any of the settings for this mode, click Modify Settings.
Target Application
Application—From the pull-down list, select the application you want
to add to this Pop-Up screen.
Click the Custom Link Settings button to set up links for your
user-defined application.
14 - 14 USING THE SMARTUI FOR WINDOWS® 95/98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND WINDOWS NT® WS 4.0
Copy
To access the Copy Configurations screen
1
Place the original face up in the ADF. The SmartUI screen will
pop up.
2 Right-click the Copy and click on Configuration. Click the
Modify Settings button to view the configuration screen of the
SmartUI.
To save your settings, click OK
—OR—
To go back to the factory default settings, click the Restore Defaults
button.
Scanner settings
From the pull-down list, select the scanning mode that is appropriate for
the type of file: Draft Copy or Fine Copy.
To change any of the settings for this mode, click Modify Settings.
Number of copies
Copies—Enter the number of copies you want to print.
To change the copy options, click the Copy Options button.
Click OK to save your Copy settings.
USING THE SMARTUI FOR WINDOWS® 95/98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND WINDOWS NT® WS 4.0 14 - 15
Send a fax
To access the Send a fax Configurations screen
1
Place the original face up in the ADF. The SmartUI screen will
pop up.
2 Right-click the Send a fax and click on Configuration. Click the
Modify Settings button to view the configuration screen of the
SmartUI.
To save your settings, click OK
—OR—
To go back to the factory default settings, click the Restore Defaults
button.
Scanner settings
From the pull-down list, select the scanning mode that is appropriate
for the type of file: Faxing, Filing and Copying; Text for OCR;
Photos; Photos (High Quality); Photos (Quick Scan); Custom;
Draft Copy or Fine Copy.
To change any of the settings for this mode, click Modify Settings.
14 - 16 USING THE SMARTUI FOR WINDOWS® 95/98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND WINDOWS NT® WS 4.0
PC-FAX Settings
PC-Fax
FAX Resolution—Fine (200 × 200)
1 To change the fax options, click the FAX Options button.
The PC-FAX Properties screen appears:
For Windows® 95/98/98SE/Me and Windows NT® WS 4.0
For Windows® 2000 Professional
2
Select the Paper Size and Orientation (Portrait or Landscape)
and click OK.
To go back to the factory default settings, click the Restore
Defaults or Default button.
USING THE SMARTUI FOR WINDOWS® 95/98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND WINDOWS NT® WS 4.0 14 - 17
15
Using the Windows®-Based
SmartUI
(For Windows ® XP)
SmartUI
The SmartUI is a software utility that allows you to quite easily, with
very few mouse clicks, access the most frequently used scanning
applications. Using the SmartUI eliminates the need to manually
launch the specific applications and allows you to scan a document
directly to a folder on your computer. The SmartUI provides four
categories of operations:
1 Scan directly to a file, E-mail, word processor or graphics
application of your choice.
2 Enhanced copy functions, such as Four/Two or One-on-One
Copying.
3 PC Faxing using the PC-Fax software.
4 Custom buttons allow you to configure a button to meet your
own application requirements.
In the Task Tray right-click on the SmartUI
to have access to the SmartUI window.
icon and select Show
USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI 15 - 1
AutoLoad the SmartUI
The SmartUI is initially configured to automatically load each time
Windows® is started. When the SmartUI is loaded the SmartUI
icon will appear in the task bar. If you don’t want the SmartUI to load
automatically, you can turn AutoLoad off.
How to turn off Auto Load
1
2
3
Right-click the SmartUI
icon in the Task Tray and select
Show.
The main SmartUI window appears. Please look at the bottom
of the window for a check box labeled “AutoLoad Pop-up”.
Uncheck the AutoLoad Pop-Up option to prevent the SmartUI
from automatically loading every time Windows is started.
15 - 2 USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI
SmartUI features
The SmartUI control center gives you the ability to configure the
hardware Scan key on your machine such as “Scan to File”. The
“Scan to File” feature allows you to scan a document directly to your
hard disk and choose the file format and destination folder without
having to run any other applications. Select which section you want
by clicking on the appropriate tab.
USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI 15 - 3
Auto Configuration
During the installation process the SmartUI checks your system to
determine the default applications for E-mail, word processing and
graphics viewer/editor.
For example, if you are using Outlook as your default E-mail
application, the SmartUI automatically will create a link and a
scanning application button for Outlook.
You can change the default application by right-clicking on any of the
scan buttons in the SmartUI and then clicking Configuration. Select
the Configuration tab and from the Application pull down menu select
a different application. For example, you can change the E-mail scan
button from Outlook Express to Outlook by changing the application
that is listed.
15 - 4 USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI
Hardware Section: Changing the Scan
to button configuration
When the SmartUI is displayed, you can access the Hardware
Section window to reconfigure the
(Scan) button on your
machine. Click the Hardware Section tab at the top left of the
SmartUI screen. (See Using the scan key (For USB or Parallel
interface cable users) on page 13-16.)
USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI 15 - 5
Scan to E-mail
To configure the Scan to E-mail feature left-click on the Scan to
E-mail button and the following screen will appear. You have the
ability to change the configuration that includes the destination
E-mail application, attachment file and the scanner settings.
To change the destination E-mail application you use the Application
pull down list to select the compatible E-mail application, which is
installed on your system.
If you wish to change the attachment file type click on the Link
Preferences button to display a list of file types.
15 - 6 USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI
Scan to File
To configure the Scan to File feature, left click on the Scan to File
button and the following screen will appear.
Select the file type for the saved image by selecting from the Format
pull down list. You can save the file to the default PaperPort folder so
the file appears in PaperPort or you can select another
folder/directory by clicking the Browse button.
USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI 15 - 7
Scan to Image
To configure the Scan to Image feature left-click on the Scan to
Image button and the following screen will appear. You have the
ability to change the configuration, which includes the destination
image format or document application.
15 - 8 USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI
To change the default setting of the scan, click on the Scan Settings
tab.
You can set the Color Mode to Black & White, 8-bit Gray or 24-bit
Color.
The resolution can be changed from 100 to 1200 dpi. You can define
the size of the paper you’re using, and you can adjust the brightness
and contrast of the image before scanning.
USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI 15 - 9
Scan to OCR
To configure the Scan to OCR feature left-click on the Scan to OCR
button and the following screen will appear. You have the ability to
change the configuration, which includes the destination
applications.
15 - 10 USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI
You have the option to send your scan as a different file type. You
can select the application from the File Type window according to
your needs.
You have the option to choose your OCR setting from Single
column output to Auto orient page.
USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI 15 - 11
Software Section
The Software Section contains four groups of scan to buttons. Each
section has a number of different buttons which are predefined for
the most frequently used applications. The Scan section contains
four buttons for Scan to File, Scan to E-mail, Scan to Word Processor
and Scan to Image applications. The Copy section contains four
buttons for N to 1 copying. The Fax section button is for sending
faxes using the PC-FAX application and the Custom section
contains three buttons with which you can assign your own function.
*1
*2
*3
*4
15 - 12 USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI
Scan
*1 Scan to File —enables you to scan directly to a disk file. You can
change the file type and destination directory, as needed.
*2 Scan to E-mail (Default: Outlook Express) —enables you to scan
a page or document directly into an E-mail application as a standard
attachment. You have the option of selecting the file type and
resolution for the attachment.
*3 Scan to Word Processor (Default: MS WordPad) —enables you to
scan a page or document, automatically run ScanSoft TextBridge
OCR and insert the text (not graphic image) into a word processing
program. You have the option of selecting the destination word
processing program, such as WordPad, MS Word, Word Perfect or
whichever word processing program is installed on your computer.
*4 Scan to Graphic Application (Default: MS Paint) —enables you to
scan a page directly into any graphic viewer/editor application. You
can select the destination application, such as MS Paint, Corel
PhotoPaint, Adobe PhotoShop, or any kind of image editor
application you already have installed on your computer.
Copy
Copy (Copy one to one)—allows you to use the PC and any
Windows® printer driver for enhanced copy operations. You can scan
the page on the machine and print the copies using any of the
features of the machine printer driver—OR—you can direct the copy
output to any standard Windows® printer driver installed on the PC
including network printers.
Four/Two to One Copy—enables you to use the Four/Two on
One-page features of the ix2700 printer driver to copy four/two
original pages onto a single output page.
USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI 15 - 13
Fax
Send a Fax (PC-FAX)—enables you to scan a page or document
and automatically send the image as a fax from the PC using the
PC-FAX software.
Custom
Scan to File—These buttons have been pre-programmed for the
Scan to File feature. You can change the configuration of each of
these buttons to meet your specific requirements by right-clicking on
a button and following the configuration menus.
15 - 14 USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI
Scan to File
The Scan to File button allows you to scan an image and save it in a
specific file type to any directory on your hard disk. This allows you
to easily archive your paper documents. To configure the file type
and save to directory right-click on the Scan to File button and click
Configuration.
The Scan Action tab is set to File and should not be changed.
USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI 15 - 15
To change the configuration click on the Configuration tab.
Select the file type for the saved image by selecting from the Format
pull down list. You can save the file to the default PaperPort folder so
the file appears in PaperPort, or you can select another
folder/directory by clicking the Browse button.
You can change the default setting by selecting the Other Folder
button and then clicking Browse and selecting the folder in which you
wish to save your files.
15 - 16 USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI
Scan to E-mail
The Scan to E-mail is automatically configured to your default E-mail
application. To change the default E-mail application or attachment
file type, right-click on the E-mail button and select “Configuration”.
The Scan Action tab is set to E-mail and should not be changed.
To change the E-mail application click on the Configuration tab. From
the Application pull down list, select your preferred E-mail
application.
USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI 15 - 17
To change the file type of the attachment click the Link Preferences
button to set up links. Check the Convert attachment to specified
file type box and then select the appropriate file type from the pull
down list.
15 - 18 USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI
File attachments
Items are mailed as file attachments using the file type you have
selected.
Convert attachments to specified file type—Click this check box if
you want to change the file type of attachments.
All documents and image items—Click this check box if you want to
convert all scanned images to the same file type.
PaperPort image items (MAX) only—Click this check box if you want
to convert only attachments that are PaperPort MAX files.
Combine items into single file, if possible—Click this check box if you
want to combine all the attachments into one file. With this box
unchecked each scanned page will be saved in its own individual file.
File Type—Select from the pull-down list the type of file you want the
scanned images to be saved in.
PaperPort Image Item (*.max)
PaperPort Browser-Viewable (*.htm)
PaperPort Self Viewing (*.exe)
PaperPort 5.0 Image Item (*.max)
PaperPort 4.0 Image Item (*.max)
PaperPort 3.0 Image Item (*.max)
Windows Bitmap (*.bmp)
PC Paintbrush (*.pcx)
PCX Multi-page (*.dcx)
JPEG (*.jpg)
TIFF-Uncompressed (*.tif)
TIFF Group 4 (*.tif)
Multi-Page -Uncompressed (*.tif)
Multi-Page - Group 4 (*.tif)
USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI 15 - 19
Scanner settings
You have the ability to change the scanner settings used to create
the file attachments. Click on the Scan Settings tab and select the
appropriate settings.
15 - 20 USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI
Scan to OCR (Word Processing
program)
Scan to OCR converts the graphic page image data to text which can
be edited by any word processor program. You can change the
default word processor program (example: Word Pad instead of
Word) and file type. You can also choose another OCR software
package besides the TextBridge OCR which is built into PaperPort.
To configure Scan to OCR right-click on the WordPad button and
select Configuration. The Scan Action tab is set to OCR and should
not be changed.
To change the word processing application click on the Configuration
Tab. You can select the destination word processing application from
the Application pull down list.
USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI 15 - 21
To change the program link preferences click the Link Preferences
button.
File Type—From the pull-down list, select the file format you want to
use for documents.
OCR—Select the OCR application from the OCR pull down list.
15 - 22 USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI
Scan to Graphics application
(example: Microsoft Paint)
The Scan to Graphics Application allows you to scan an image so
you can edit the image. To change the default graphics application
right-click on the button and select Configuration.
The Scan Action tab is set to Application and should not be changed.
To change the configuration of the destination application click on
the Configuration Tab.
USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI 15 - 23
To change the destination application select the appropriate
application from the Application pull down list.
To change the other configuration options click the Link Preferences
button.
This option enables you to reduce image to screen resolution
(96dpi), show a warning if the item has annotations, update the
original item if sent item is modified, if needed.
15 - 24 USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI
Copy
The copy buttons can be customized to allow you to take advantage
of the features built into the ix2700 printer driver to do advanced copy
functions such as n-in-1 printing.
The Copy buttons are automatically linked to the default Windows
printer driver. You can set any printer as the default printer including
non-Imagistics’s printers. Before you can use the Copy buttons you
must first configure the printer driver by right-clicking on a Copy
button and selecting Configuration.
In the Scan Settings window you can select the color mode,
resolution, paper size, brightness and contrast settings to be used.
To finish the Copy button configuration you must set the printer
driver. Click the Copy options button to display the printer driver
settings.
The copy options screen will vary depending upon which model
you purchased.
USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI 15 - 25
Select the number of Pages Per Sheet from the Scaling selections.
As an example to configure the section Copy button to copy two
pages to one you must select 2 in 1.
You must configure each of the copy buttons before they can be
used.
15 - 26 USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI
Fax setting (PC-Fax using the ix2700
Fax Driver)
The machine includes a PC-Fax driver, which allows any Windows
Application to send a Fax as simply as printing a document. The
SmartUI automatically configures the Fax button to use the PC-FAX
driver no user configuration is required.
The Scan Action tab is set to Application and should not be changed.
To change the PC-FAX settings click the Link Preferences button
found in the configuration tab.
USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI 15 - 27
FAX settings
PC-FAX
To change the driver settings, click on the Setup button. Select the
Paper Size, Paper Source. If you need more customized setup, click
on the Options button.
15 - 28 USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI
Select the Paper Size, Orientation (Portrait or Landscape) and
Resolution (200x200 dpi or 200x100 dpi), and click OK.
To return to the factory default settings, click the Default button.
USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI 15 - 29
Custom: User-defined buttons
There are up to three Custom buttons on the SmartUI. You can set
your own preferences and configuration to fit your required
application.
To configure a Custom Button right click on the button and then click
Configuration. The configuration window will appear. You have four
function choices Application, File, OCR and Email.
Application: This setting will link the Control Panel button to any
button which appears on the PaperPort Send to Bar. Please see the
PaperPort help file for more information regarding PaperPort
compatible applications.
File: This setting allows you to save a scanned image to any
directory on local or network hard disk. You can also select the file
format to be used.
OCR: Scanned documents will be converted to editable text files. If
you have a third party OCR software package installed on your PC
you can select it. The default OCR software is TextBridge which is
built into PaperPort 8.0. You can also select the destination word
processor and file format for the editable text.
E-mail: Scanned images will be attached to an email message. You
can choose which E-mail package to use if you have more than one
installed on your system. You can also select the file type for the
attachment and create a quick send list of E-mail addresses chosen
from your default E-mail address book.
Customizing a user-defined button
To configure a Custom button right-click on the button and then click
Configuration. Please follow the following guide lines for Custom
Button configuration.
1. Select the Scan Action
Select the type of scan by clicking the appropriate button.
15 - 30 USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI
2. Select Configuration for the Scan Type.
To configure the scan operation click on the Configuration Tab.
Depending upon which Scan Type button you selected you will see
a different Configuration Tab list of settings.
Application:
Select the destination application program from the pull down list.
Click on Link Preferences to set the Send to options. You can select
the application from the scroll menu on the left.
USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI 15 - 31
File:
Select the file format from the Format pull down list. You can either
send the file to the default PaperPort directory or select your own
destination directory by selecting Other Folder. Use the Browse
button to select the destination directory.
15 - 32 USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI
OCR:
Select the destination word processing application program from the
pull down list.
Click on Link Preferences and select the destination Application from
the scroll menu on the left. Select the File Type from the File Type
pull down list. You can also choose another OCR application from
the OCR pull down list if another is installed on you system.
Scansoft® TextBridge® is installed as part of the PaperPort 8.0
application.
USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI 15 - 33
E-mail:
Select the destination E-mail application program from the pull down
list.
Click on the Link Preferences button to configure the Send To
E-mail options. You can select the File type and Quick Send E-mail
address list.
15 - 34 USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI
3. Select Scan Settings.
You can select the scanner settings from each of the Scan Type
options for the Custom buttons. You have the option to select Color
Mode, Resolution, Paper Size and Brightness and Contrast settings.
USING THE WINDOWS® -BASED SMARTUI 15 - 35
16 Using Remote Setup
(For Windows ®)
Remote Setup
The Remote Setup application lets you set up your machine by using
the ease and speed of programming on your PC. When you access
this application, the settings on your machine will be downloaded to
your PC and displayed on your computer screen. If you change the
settings, you can upload them directly to the machine.
You can't use the Remote Setup application if your machine is
only connected to a Network with the optional Network LAN
board. (See Web Based Management in the Network User's
Guide.)
OK button
When you click OK, the process of uploading the data to the machine
begins. The Remote Setup program is closed if an error message is
displayed, enter the correct data again and then click OK.
Cancel button
The Cancel button clears your changes and exits the Remote Setup
application without uploading any data to the machine.
Apply button
The Apply button uploads the data to the machine, but stays in the
Remote Setup application so you can make more changes.
USING REMOTE SETUP 16 - 1
Print button
The Print button prints the selected items on the machine. You
cannot print the Remote Setup changes until you click the Apply
button to upload the new data to the machine. Then you can click the
Print button to get an up-to-date printout.
Export button
Click the Export button to save your current settings to a file.
Import button
Click the Import button to read the settings from your saved file into
the Remote Setup screen.
You can use the Export and Import buttons to save and use
several sets of settings for your machine.
16 - 2 USING REMOTE SETUP
17 Using PC-FAX software
(For Windows ®)
PC-FAX sending
The PC-FAX feature lets you send a file from your PC.
You can create a file in any application on your PC, and then send it
as a PC-FAX. You can even attach a cover page note.
All you have to do is set up the receiving parties as Members or
Groups in your PC-FAX Address Book. Then you can use the
Address Book Search feature to quickly find them to address your
fax.
■ PC-FAX is available in Black & White only.
■ If you are using Windows ® XP, Windows NT® 4.0 or
Windows® 2000 Professional, we recommend that you are
logged on with administrator rights.
USING PC-FAX SOFTWARE 17 - 1
Setting up user information
You can access the User Information from the FAX Sending
dialog box by clicking
.
(See Sending a file as a PC-FAX using the Facsimile style on
page 17-15.)
1
2
3
From the Start menu, select Programs, Imagistics,
Multi-Function Suite, and then select PC-FAX Setup.
The PC-FAX Setup dialog box will appear:
You must enter this information to create the Fax Header and
Cover Page.
Click OK to save the User Information.
17 - 2 USING PC-FAX SOFTWARE
Sending setup
From the PC-FAX Setup dialog box, click the Sending tab to display
the screen below.
The include header option sends an additional page of information
along with fax or E-mail data which contains user and subject
information.
The user has the choice of two user interfaces: Simple style or
Facsimile style. To change the user interface select the interface
setting you want: Simple style or Facsimile style.
USING PC-FAX SOFTWARE 17 - 3
Outside line access
If you need to enter a number to access an outside line, enter it here.
This is sometimes required by a local PBX telephone system (for
example, if you must dial 9, to get an outside line in your office).
Include header
To add header information to the top of the fax pages you send,
check the Include header box.
Addressbook file
You can select more than one database file to use with the Address
Book. To select you must enter the path and file name of the
database file.
—OR—
Use the Browse button to find the database to select.
17 - 4 USING PC-FAX SOFTWARE
User interface
In the Sending tab, select user interface.
You can choose the Simple Style or the Facsimile Style.
Simple style
Facsimile style
USING PC-FAX SOFTWARE 17 - 5
Speed Dial setup
From the PC-FAX Setup dialog box, click the Speed Dial tab. (To
use this feature you must select the Facsimile Style user interface.)
You can register a Member or Group on each of the ten Speed Dial
buttons.
To register an address in a Speed Dial button:
1 Click the Speed Dial button you want to program.
2 Click the Member or Group you want to store on the Speed Dial
button.
3 Click Add >> to save it.
To clear a Speed Dial button:
1 Click the Speed Dial button you want to clear.
2 Click Clear to erase it.
17 - 6 USING PC-FAX SOFTWARE
The Address Book
From the Start menu, select Programs, Imagistics,
Multi-Function Suite, and then click PC-FAX Address Book.
The Address Book dialog box will appear:
USING PC-FAX SOFTWARE 17 - 7
Setting up a Member in the Address Book
In the Address Book dialog box you can add, edit and delete stored
information of Members and Groups.
1 In the Address Book dialog box, click the icon to add a
Member.
The Address Book Member Setup dialog box will appear:
2
In the Member Setup dialog box, type the Member’s information.
Name is a required field. Click OK to save the information.
17 - 8 USING PC-FAX SOFTWARE
Setting up a Group for Broadcasting
If you often send the same PC-FAX to several Members, you can
combine them in a Group.
1 In the Address Book dialog box, click the icon to create a
Group.
The Group Setup dialog box appears:
2
3
4
Type the name of the new Group in the Group Name field.
In the Available Names box, select each Member to be
included in the Group, and then click Add >>.
Members you add to the Group will be added to the
Group Members box.
After all the members you want have been added, click OK.
USING PC-FAX SOFTWARE 17 - 9
Editing Member information
1
2
3
4
Select the Member or Group you want to edit.
Click the edit
icon.
Change the Member or Group information.
Click OK to save your changes.
Deleting a Member or Group
1
2
3
Select the Member or Group you want to delete.
Click the delete
icon.
When the Confirm Item Delete dialog box appears, click OK.
Exporting the Address Book
You can export the whole Address Book to an ASCII text file (*.csv).
Or if you wish, you can select and create a Vcard that will be attached
to that Member’s outgoing E-mail. (A Vcard is an electronic business
card that contains the sender’s contact information.)
To export the whole current Address book:
If you are creating a Vcard, you must first select the member.
If you select Vcard in Step 1, Save as type: will be Vcard (*.vcf).
1
2
From the Address Book select File, point to Export, and then
click Text.
—OR—
Click Vcard and go to Step 5.
From the Available Items column, select the data fields you
wish to Export and then click Add >>.
Select the items in the order you want them listed.
3
If you are exporting to an ASCII file, select the Divide Character
- Tab or Comma. This selects between a Tab or Comma to
separate the data fields.
17 - 10 USING PC-FAX SOFTWARE
4
Select OK to save the data.
5
Type the name of the file, and then select Save.
USING PC-FAX SOFTWARE 17 - 11
Importing to the Address Book
You can import ASCII text files (*.csv) or Vcards (electronic business
cards) into your Address Book.
To import an ASCII text file:
1 From the Address Book select File, point to Import, and then
click Text.
—OR—
Click Vcard and go to Step 5.
2
From the Available Items column select the data fields you
want to Import, and click Add >>.
From the Available Items list select the fields in the same order
they are listed in the Import text file.
3
4
Select the Divide Character - Tab or Comma based on the file
format you are importing.
To import the data click OK.
17 - 12 USING PC-FAX SOFTWARE
5
Type the name of the file, and then select Open.
If you selected a text file in Step 1, the Files of type: will be
Text file (*.csv).
Setting up a Cover Page
From the PC-FAX dialog box click
to access the PC-Fax Cover
Page setup screen. (See Sending a file as a PC-FAX using the
Facsimile style on page 17-15.)
The PC-FAX Cover Page Setup dialog box will appear:
USING PC-FAX SOFTWARE 17 - 13
You can enter information in each field
If you are sending a fax to more than one recipient, the recipient
information will not be printed on the Cover Page.
To
From
Comment
Type the comment you want to add to the cover page.
Select Cover Page Form
Select the cover page format you want to use.
Import BMP file
You can insert a bitmap file, such as your company logo, in the cover
page.
Use the browse button to select the BMP file, and then select the
alignment style.
Count Cover Page
When the Count Cover Page box is checked, the Cover Page will be
included in the page numbering. When this box is not checked, the
Cover Page will not be included.
17 - 14 USING PC-FAX SOFTWARE
Sending a file as a PC-FAX using the Facsimile
style
1
2
3
Create a file in Word, Excel, Paint, Draw or any other application
on your PC.
From the File menu, select Print.
The Print dialog box will appear:
Select PC-FAX as your printer, and then click Print.
The Fax Sending dialog box will appear.
USING PC-FAX SOFTWARE 17 - 15
4
Enter the fax number using any of the following methods:
■ Using the dial pad enter the number.
■ Click any of the 10 Speed Dial buttons.
■ Click the Address Book button, and then select a Member
or Group from the Address Book.
If you make a mistake you can click Clear to delete all the
entries.
5
6
To include a Cover Page, click
Cover Page On, and then
click the Cover Page
icon to enter or edit the Cover Page
information.
Click Start to send the fax.
If you want to cancel the fax, click Stop.
Redial
If you want to redial a number, click Redial to scroll through the last
five fax numbers, and then click Start.
Sending a file as a PC-FAX using the Simple style
1
2
Create a file in Word, Excel, Paint, Draw or any other application
on your PC.
From the File menu, select Print.
The Print dialog box will appear:
17 - 16 USING PC-FAX SOFTWARE
3
Select PC-FAX as your printer, and then click Print.
The FAX Sending dialog box will appear:
4
In the To: field, type the fax number of the recipient. You can
also use the Address Book to select destination fax numbers by
clicking the To: button. If you made a mistake entering a
number, click the Clear button to delete all the entries.
To send a Cover Page and note, click the Cover Page On check
box.
5
You can also click the
6
7
icon to create or edit a cover page.
When you are ready to send your fax, click the Send
If you wish to cancel the fax, click the Cancel
icon.
icon.
USING PC-FAX SOFTWARE 17 - 17
Setting up PC-FAX receiving
(Windows® 95/98/98SE/Me/2000
Professional and Windows NT® WS 4.0 only)
Running PC-FAX Receiving
From the Start menu, select Programs, Imagistics ,
Multi-Function Suite and then select ‘PC-FAX Receiving’.
The PC-FAX
bar for this Windows® session.
icon will appear on your PC Task
Setting up your PC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Right-click the PC-FAX
icon on your PC
Task Bar, and then click PC-Fax RX Setup.
The PC-Fax RX Setup dialog box will appear:
In Ring Delay, select the number of rings before you want your
PC to answer Incoming calls.
In Save file to, use the Browse button if you want to change the
path where PC-FAX files will be saved.s
In File Format, select .tif or .max for the format the received
document will be saved in. The default format is .tif.
If you want to, you can check the Play wave file when
receiving FAX check box, and then enter the path.
To load PC FAX receiving automatically when you start up
Windows®, select the Add to Startup folder check box.
17 - 18 USING PC-FAX SOFTWARE
Viewing new PC-FAX messages
Each time you start to receive a PC-FAX, the icon will flash
blue and red. Once the fax has been received the icon will remain
red. The red icon will change to green once the received fax has
been received.
1 Run PaperPort.
2 Open the Fax Received folder.
3 Double-click any of the new faxes to open and view them.
The title of your unread PC message will be the date and time
until you assign a file name.
For example “Fax 2-20-2002 16:40:21.tif”
USING PC-FAX SOFTWARE 17 - 19
Receiving a fax into the PC
(Windows® XP only)
How to receive a fax automatically
Before you can start receiving faxes, please install the appropriate
Windows XP driver (Windows XP In-box driver or ix2700 Windows
XP driver). After the driver is installed, refer to the following
information to configure your Windows XP PC for Fax receiving.
1 To activate Faxing receiving, click Set up faxing in the Printer
Tasks menu.
2
The FAX services will be installed on your PC.
3
A Fax icon will then appear in the Printers and Faxes folder. If
the Fax icon does not appear, click Install a local fax printer in
the Printer tasks menu.
17 - 20 USING PC-FAX SOFTWARE
4
Select the Start, All Programs, Accessories,
Communications, Fax, Fax Console.
If you have not configured your fax connection, the following
screen will be displayed.
Enter your details, ensuring you specify the outside line access
number if necessary and click OK.
Select the My location radio button if it is not selected and then
click OK.
USING PC-FAX SOFTWARE 17 - 21
5
The Fax Configuration Wizard starts. Click Next.
6
Enter the sender information, and then click Next.
7
Select Imagistics ix2700 in the Please select the fax device
pull-down list. Click to select the Enable Receive check box.
Specify the number of rings before your machine will attempt to
answer the fax. Click Next.
17 - 22 USING PC-FAX SOFTWARE
8
Enter the Transmitting Subscriber Identification (TSID), and
then click Next.
9
Enter the Called Subscriber Identification (CSID), and then
click Next.
10
Select if you print a received fax or save it in a folder, and then
click Next.
USING PC-FAX SOFTWARE 17 - 23
11
Click Finish.
When PC-FAX Receiving is active, you cannot run the Remote
Setup utility. To use Remote Setup, check off Enable Receive
in Step 7.
For information on how to use PC-FAX Sending and Receiving,
please refer to Help in the Fax Console.
The PC-FAX installation is now complete.
17 - 24 USING PC-FAX SOFTWARE
How to view the received faxes
Faxes that are received into the PC will appear in the Fax Console.
Click Start, point to All Programs, Accessories,
Communications, Fax, and then click Fax Console to open the Fax
Console. In the left pane, expand the Fax folder (if it is not already
expanded).
The Fax folder contains the following folders:
■ The Incoming folder contains faxes that are currently being
received.
■ The Inbox folder contains faxes that have been received.
■ The Outbox folder contains faxes that are scheduled to be sent.
■ The Sent Items folder contains faxes that have been successfully
sent.
USING PC-FAX SOFTWARE 17 - 25
your Machine with a
18 Using
Macintosh
®
Setting up your USB-equipped Apple®
Macintosh®
Before you can connect the machine to your Macintosh®, you
must buy a USB cable that is not longer than 6 feet (1.8 metres).
Do not connect the machine to a USB port on a key board
or a non-powered USB hub.
The features supported by the machine will depend on the operating
system you are using. The chart below shows which features are
supported.
Feature
Mac OS
Mac OS X
8.6
9.X
10.1
10.2.1
or greater*1
Printing
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Scanning (TWAIN)
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
PC-FAX sending
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Remote Setup
No
No
Yes
Yes
*1 For Mac OS X 10.2 users, please upgrade to Mac OS X 10.2.1 or
greater.
USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH® 18 - 1
Using the printer driver with your
Apple® Macintosh®
(Mac OS 8.6-9.2)
To select a Printer:
1 Open the Chooser from the Apple menu.
2
Click the Imagistics Laser icon. On the right side of the
Chooser window, click the printer you want to print to. Close the
Chooser.
18 - 2 USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH ®
To print a document:
1 From the application software such as Simple Text, click File
menu and select Page Setup. You can change the settings for
Paper Size, Orientation, and Scaling, and then click OK.
2
From application software such as Presto! PageManager®, click
File menu and select Print. Click Print to start printing.
If you want to change Copies, Pages, Resolution, Paper Source
and Media Type, select your settings before clicking Print.
USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH® 18 - 3
Device Options allows you to select Duplex.
18 - 4 USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH ®
Using the Printer Driver with Your
Apple® Macintosh® (Mac OS X)
Choosing page setup options
1
From application software such as TextEdit, click the File menu
and select Page Setup. Make sure ix2700 is selected in the
Format for pop-up menu. You can change the settings for
Paper Size, Orientation and Scaling, then click OK.
2
From application software such as Presto! PageManager®, click
File menu and select Print. Click Print to start printing.
USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH® 18 - 5
Specific settings
Set the Media Type, Resolution, Toner Save, and other settings.
Press Copies & Pages to select settings you want to change.
Duplex
18 - 6 USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH ®
Printer settings
USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH® 18 - 7
Using the PS driver with your Apple®
Macintosh®
To use the PS driver on a Network, see the NC-9100h Network
User’s Guide on CD-ROM.
To use the PS driver with a USB cable, you need to set the
Emulation to BR-Script3 (Menu, 4, 1) before connecting
the USB cable. (See Setting the Emulation Selection on page
11-12.)
The PS driver does not support the following functions:
■ HQ 1200
■ Secure Print
■ PC-Fax Sending
For Mac OS 8.6 to 9.2 users
1
For Mac® OS 8.6 to 9.04 Users:
Open the Apple Extras folder. Open the Apple LaserWriter
Software folder.
For Mac® OS 9.1 to 9.2 Users:
Open the Applications (Mac® OS 9) folder. Open the Utilities
folder*.
* The screens are based on Mac® OS 9.04.
18 - 8 USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH ®
2
Open the Desktop Printer Utility icon.
3
Select Printer (USB), and then click OK.
USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH® 18 - 9
4
Click Change... in the PostScriptTM Printer Description (PPD)
file.
Select Imagistics ix2700, and then click Select.
5
Click Change... in the USB Printer Selection.
Select Imagistics ix2700, and then click OK.
18 - 10 USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH ®
6
Click Create....
7
Enter your machine name (ix2700), and then click Save.
8
Select Quit from the File menu.
9
Click the ix2700 icon on the Desktop.
USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH® 18 - 11
10
Select Set Default Printer from the Printing menu.
For Mac OS X users
You need to install the PS driver using the following instructions.
■ If you use a USB cable and your Macintosh is “Mac OS X”,
only one printer driver for an machine can be registered in
Print Center.
■ If a Native Driver (ix2700) is already listed in Printer list, you
will need to delete it and then install the PS driver.
■ To use the PS driver with a USB cable, you need to set the
Emulation to BR-Script3 (Menu, 4,1) before
connecting the USB cable. (See Setting the Emulation
Selection on page 11-12.)
1
Select Applications from the Go menu.
18 - 12 USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH ®
2
Open the Utilities folder.
3
Open the Print Center icon.
4
Click Add Printer… .
USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH® 18 - 13
5
Select USB.
6
Select ix2700, and then click Add.
7
Select Quit Printer Center from the Print Center menu.
18 - 14 USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH ®
Sending a fax from your Macintosh®
application
For Mac OS 8.6-9.2 users
You can send a fax directly from a Macintosh® application by doing
the following:
1 Create a document in a Macintosh application.
2 To send a fax, select Print from the File menu.
The Printer dialog box will appear:
3
When Printer is selected, the top button shows Print and the
Address button is grayed.
From the Output pull-down menu, select Facsimile.
When Facsimile is selected, the top button changes to Send
Fax and the Address button will be available.
USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH® 18 - 15
4
5
6
Click Send Fax.
The Send Fax dialog box appears:
The Send Fax dialog box has two list boxes. The left box shows
all the previously Stored Fax Numbers and the right box shows
the Destination Fax Numbers as you select them.
To address the fax, type a fax number in the Input Fax Number
box.
When you are finished addressing your fax, click Send Fax.
To select and only send certain pages of the document, click OK
to go to the Print dialog box.
If you click Send Fax without addressing your fax, the following
error message will appear:
Click OK to go to the Send Fax dialog box.
18 - 16 USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH ®
For Mac OS X users
You can send a fax directly from a Macintosh® application by doing
the following:
1 Create a document in a Macintosh application.
2 To send a fax, select Print from the File menu.
The Printer dialog box will appear:
3
Select Send Fax from pull-down menu.
USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH® 18 - 17
4
Select Facsimile from the Output pull-down menu.
5
To address the fax, type a fax number in the Input Fax
Numbers box, and the click Print.
If you want to send a fax to more than one number, click Add
after entering the first fax number. The destination fax numbers
will be listed in the dialog box.
18 - 18 USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH ®
Drag a vCard from the Mac® OS X Address Book
application
1
2
Click Address Book button.
Drag a vCard from the Mac® OS X Address Book application
to the Destination Fax Numbers filed.
When you are finished addressing your fax, click Print.
The vCard used must contain a work fax or home fax number.
USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH® 18 - 19
When you choose work fax or home fax from the Stored Fax
Numbers pull-down list, only the fax number stored in the
Mac OS X Address Book for the selected category will be used.
If the fax number is stored in only one of the Mac OS X Address
Book categories, the number will be retrieved no matter which
category you have selected (work or home).
18 - 20 USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH ®
Using the TWAIN scanner driver with
your Macintosh®
The ix2700 software includes a TWAIN Scanner driver for
Macintosh®. You can use this Macintosh ® TWAIN Scanner driver
with any applications that support the TWAIN specifications.
Mac OS X Scanning is supported in Mac OS X 10.2.1 or greater.
Accessing the scanner
Run your Macintosh® TWAIN-compliant application software. The
first time you use the Imagistics TWAIN driver, set it as the default by
choosing Select Source (or the other menu name to select the
device). Afterwards, for each document you scan choose Acquire
Image or Scan. The scanner setup dialog box will appear.
The screen shown in this section are from Mac OS 9. The
screen on your Macintosh® may vary depending on your
Operating System.
The method of selecting the source or choosing to scan may
vary depending on the application software you are using.
(OS 8.6–9.2)
USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH® 18 - 21
Scanning an image into your Macintosh®
You can scan a whole page
—OR—
scan a portion after prescanning the document.
Scanning a whole page
1
2
3
Place the original face up in the ADF, or face down on the
scanner glass.
Adjust the following settings, if needed, in the Scanner Setup
dialog box:
Resolution
Color Type
Scanning Area
Brightness
Contrast
Click Start.
When scanning has finished, the image will appear in your
graphics application.
18 - 22 USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH ®
PreScanning an image
PreScanning allows you to scan an image quickly at a low resolution.
A thumbnail version will appear in the Scanning Area. This is only a
preview of the image, so you can see how it will look. The PreScan
button will allow you to crop unwanted areas from the images. When
you are satisfied with the preview, click Start to scan the image.
1 Insert the original face up in the ADF, or face down on the
scanner glass.
2 Click PreScan.
The whole image will be scanned into your Macintosh® and will
appear in the Scanning Area of the Scanner dialog box:
3 To scan a portion of the prescanned image, click and drag the
mouse to crop it.
4
5
6
7
Insert original in the ADF, if you are using ADF.
Make your adjustments to the settings for Resolution,
Color Type (Gray Scale), Brightness, Contrast, and Size in
the Scanner Setup dialog box.
Click Start.
This time only the cropped area of the original will appear in the
Scanning Area.
In your editing software, you can refine the image.
USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH® 18 - 23
Settings in the Scanner window
Image
Resolution
From the Resolution pop-up menu choose the scanning resolution.
Higher resolutions use more memory and transfer time, but produce
a finer scanned image.
18 - 24 USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH ®
Color Type
Black & White—Set the image Type to Black and White for text or
line art. For photographic images, set the image type to Gray (Error
diffusion) or True Gray.
Gray (Error Diffusion)—is used for documents with photographic
images or graphics. (Error Diffusion is a method for creating
simulated gray images by placing black dots instead of the true gray
dots in a specific matrix instead of true gray dots.)
True Gray—is used for documents with photographic images or
graphics. This mode is more exact because it uses up to 256 shades
of gray. It requires the most memory and takes the longest transfer
time.
Colors—Choose either 8-bit Color, which scans up to 8-bit Color or
24-bit Color which scans up to 16.8 million colors. Although using
24-bit Color creates an image with the most accurate colors, the
image file will be about three times larger than a file created with 8-bit
Color.
USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH® 18 - 25
Scanning Area
Set the Size to one of the following:
■ Letter (8.5 × 11 inches)
■ A4 (210 × 297 mm)
■ Legal (8 1/2 × 14 in.)
■ A5 (148 × 210 mm)
■ B5 (182 × 257 mm)
■ Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches)
■ Business Card (90 × 60 mm)
■ Custom (user adjustable it from 0.35 × 0.35 in. to 8.5 × 11.69 in.
or 8.9 × 8.9 mm to 216 × 356 mm)
After you choose a custom size, you can adjust the scanning area.
Click and hold the mouse button as you drag the mouse to crop the
image.
Width: Enter the width of the custom size.
Height: Enter the height of the custom size.
Business Card Size
To scan business cards, select the Business Card size (90 × 60 mm)
and place the business card at the center of scanner glass.
When you are scanning photographs or other images to use in a
word processor or other graphics application, it is a good idea to try
different settings for the Contrast, Mode and Resolution to determine
which settings look the best.
18 - 26 USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH ®
Adjusting the Image
Brightness
Adjust the Brightness setting to get the best image. The TWAIN
Scanner driver offers 100 Brightness levels (-50 to 50). The default
value is 0, representing an ‘average’ setting.
You can set the Brightness level by dragging the slide bar to the
right to lighten the image or to the left to darken the image. You can
also type a value in the box to set the level. Click OK.
If the scanned image is too light, set a lower Brightness level and
scan the image again.
If the image is too dark, set a higher Brightness level and scan the
image again.
Contrast
You can only adjust the Contrast level when you have selected one
of the Gray Scale settings, it is not available when you have selected
Black & White as the selected Color Type.
Increasing the Contrast level (by dragging the slide bar to the right)
emphasizes dark and light areas of the image, while reducing the
Contrast level (by dragging the slide bar to the left) reveals more
detail in the gray areas. Instead of using the slide bar, you can type
a value in the box to set the Contrast. Click OK.
USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH® 18 - 27
Remote Setup (Mac OS® X)
The Remote Setup application allows you to quickly set up your
machine by taking advantage of the ease and speed of programming
on your Macintosh®. When you access this application, the settings
on your machine will be downloaded automatically to your
Macintosh® and displayed on your computer screen. If you change
the settings, you can upload them directly to the machine.
The ‘Remote Setup’ application icon is in Macintosh
HD/Library/Printers/Imagistics/Utility.
OK
This starts the process of uploading the data to the machine and
exiting the remote setup program. If an error message is displayed
enter the correct data again. Click OK.
Cancel
This exits the remote setup application without uploading the data to
the machine.
Apply
This uploads the data to the machine, but does not exit the remote
setup application.
Print
This command prints the selected items on the machine. You can not
print the data until it is uploaded to the machine. Click Apply to
upload the new data to the machine and click Print.
18 - 28 USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH ®
Export
This command saves the current configuration settings to a file.
Import
This command reads the settings from a file.
USING YOUR MACHINE WITH A MACINTOSH® 18 - 29
Scanning
19 Network
(Windows 98/98SE/Me/2000
®
Professional and XP only)
To use the machine as a Network Scanner, the Network board
should be installed into the machine (ix2700 standard) and
configured with TCP/IP and mail server settings if you use Scan to
E-mail (E-mail server). You can set or change Network board
settings from the control panel or with the BRAdmin Professional
utility or Web Management. (Please see the Network User's Guide
on the CD-ROM.)
Registering your PC with the machine
If you need to change the machine that was registered to your PC
during the installation of Multi-Function Suite (see Quick Setup
Guide on page 38), follow the steps below.
1 For Windows® 98/Me/2000
From the Start menu, select Control panel, Scanners and
Cameras, and then right-click Scanner Device icon and select
Properties to view the Network Scanner Properties dialog box.
For Windows® XP
From the Start menu, select Control panel, Printers and
Other Hardware, Scanner and Cameras (or Control panel,
Scanners and Cameras).
NETWORK SCANNING (WINDOWS® 98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND XP ONLY) 19 - 1
Right-click Scanner Device icon and select properties to view
the Network Scanner Properties dialog box.
2
Click the Network Setting tab in the dialog box and select a
method to specify the machine as a Network scanner for your
PC.
<
Specify your machine by address
Enter the actual IP address of the machine in the IP Address field.
Click Apply and then OK.
Specify your machine by Name
Enter the machine Node name in the Node Name field.
Click Apply and then OK.
19 - 2 NETWORK SCANNING (WINDOWS® 98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND XP ONLY)
Search from a list of available device
Click Browse and select the appropriate device you want to use.
Click OK.
Click Apply and then OK.
3
Click the Scan To Button tab in the dialog box and enter your
PC Name in the Display Name field. The machine's LCD
displays the Name you enter. Default setting is your PC Name.
You can enter a name if you like.
4
You can avoid receiving unwanted documents by setting a
4-digit PIN Number. Enter your PIN Number in the PIN Number
and Retype PIN Number field. To send data to a PC protected
by a PIN Number, the LCD prompts to enter the PIN Number
before the document can be scanned and sent to the machine.
(See Using the Scan key on page 19-4 to 19-8.)
NETWORK SCANNING (WINDOWS® 98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND XP ONLY) 19 - 3
Using the Scan key
Scan to E-mail (PC)
When you select Scan to E-mail (PC) your original will be scanned
and sent directly to the PC you designated on your network. The
SmartUI will activate the default E-mail application on the designated
PC for addressing to the recipient. You can scan a black and white
or color original and it will be sent with the E-mail from the PC as an
attachment.
For Network Scanning the SmartUI selections are used only for
configuring the Scan button. You will not be able to initiate a
Network scan from the SmartUI.
You can change the
(Scan ) configuration. For Windows®
98/98SE/Me/2000: (See Scan to E-mail on page 14-10 to 14-11.)
(For Windows® XP: See Hardware Section: Changing the Scan to
button configuration on page 15-5 to 15-9.)
1 Place the original face up in the ADF, or face down on the
scanner glass.
2
3
4
5
Press
(Scan).
Press
or
to select Scan
▲ Scan to E-mail
Scan to Image
to E-mail.
Scan to OCR
Press Enter.
▼ Scan to File
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Press
or
to select PC.
Press Enter.
—OR—
If there isn't other selection, go to Step 5.
Press
or
to select the destination PC you want to use
for E-mailing your original.
Press Enter.
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN Number, enter the 4-digit
PIN Number for the destination PC on the control panel.
Press Enter.
The machine will start the scanning process.
19 - 4 NETWORK SCANNING (WINDOWS® 98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND XP ONLY)
Scan to E-mail (E-mail server)
When you select Scan to E-mail (E-mail server) you can scan a black
and white or color original and send it directly to an E-mail address
from the machine. Your original is sent as an E-mail attachment in a
TIFF format for Black and White or you can choose PDF or JPEG for
color.
Scan to E-mail (E-mail Server) requires SMTP/POP3 mail
server support. (See Network User’s Guide on the CD-ROM)
1
Place the original face up in the ADF, or face down on the
scanner glass.
2
3
Press
4
5
6
7
8
9
(Scan).
Press
or
to select Scan to E-mail.
Press Enter .
Press
or
to select
▲ Scan to E-mail
Scan to Image
E-mail Server.
Scan to OCR
Press Enter .
▼ Scan to File
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
—OR—
If there isn't other selection, go to Step 5.
Press
or
to select Change Quality.
Press Enter .
Press
or
to select Color 150 dpi, Color 300
dpi, Color 600 dpi, B/W 200 dpi or B/W 200×100 dpi.
Press Enter .
If you select B/W 200 dpi or B/W 200×100 dpi in Step 6, go
to Step 8.
—OR—
If you select Color 150 dpi, Color 300 dpi or Color 600
dpi in Step 6, go to Step 7.
Press
or
to select PDF or JPEG.
Press Enter .
The LCD prompts you to enter an address. Enter the destination E-mail
address from the dial pad or use the One-Touch key or Speed Dial key.
Press Start .
The machine will start the scanning process.
NETWORK SCANNING (WINDOWS® 98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND XP ONLY) 19 - 5
Scan to Image
When you select Scan to Image your original will be scanned and
sent directly to the PC you designated on your network. The SmartUI
will activate the default graphics application on the designated PC.
You can change the Scan configuration. (For Windows ®
98/Me/2000: See Scan to Image on page 14-14.) (For Windows® XP:
See Hardware Section: Changing the Scan to button configuration
on page 15-5 to 15-10.)
For Network Scanning the SmartUI selections are used only for
configuring the Scan button. You will not be able to initiate a
network scan from the SmartUI.
1
Place the original face up in the ADF, or face down on the
scanner glass.
2
3
Press
4
(Scan).
Press
or
to select Scan
▲ Scan to E-mail
Scan to Image
to Image.
Scan to OCR
Press Enter.
▼ Scan to File
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Press
or
to select a
destination you want to send.
Press Enter.
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN Number, enter the 4-digit
PIN Number for the destination PC on the control panel.
Press Enter.
The machine will start the scanning process.
19 - 6 NETWORK SCANNING (WINDOWS® 98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND XP ONLY)
Scan to OCR
When you select Scan to OCR your original will be scanned and sent
directly to the PC you designated on your network. The SmartUI will
activate ScanSoft® TextBridge® and convert your original into text for
viewing and editing from a word processing application on the
designated PC. You can change the Scan configuration.
(For Windows® 98/Me/2000: See Scan to OCR (Word Processor) on
page 14-12 to 14-13.) (For Windows® XP: See Hardware Section:
Changing the Scan to button configuration on page 15-5 to 15-11.)
For Network Scanning the SmartUI selections are used only for
configuring the Scan button. You will not be able to initiate a
network scan from the SmartUI.
1
Place the original face up in the ADF, or face down on the
scanner glass.
2
3
Press
4
(Scan).
Press
or
to select Scan
▲ Scan to E-mail
Scan to Image
to OCR.
Scan to OCR
Press Enter .
▼ Scan to File
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Press
or
to select a
destination you want to send.
Press Enter .
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN Number, enter the 4-digit
PIN Number for the destination PC on the control panel.
Press Enter .
The machine will start the scanning process.
NETWORK SCANNING (WINDOWS® 98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND XP ONLY) 19 - 7
Scan to File
When you select Scan to File you can scan a black and white or color
original and send it directly to a PC you designate on your network. The
file will be saved in the folder and file format that you have configured in
the SmartUI on the designated PC. You can change the Scan
configuration.
(For Windows® 98/Me/2000: See Scan to File on page 14-8 to 14-9.)
(For Windows® XP: See Hardware Section: Changing the Scan to
button configuration on page 15-5 to 15-11.)
For Network Scanning the SmartUI selections are used only for
configuring the Scan button. You will not be able to initiate a
network scan from the SmartUI.
1
Place the original face up in the ADF, or face down on the
scanner glass.
2
3
Press
4
(Scan).
Press
or
to select Scan
▲ Scan to E-mail
Scan to Image
to File.
Scan to OCR
Press Enter.
▼ Scan to File
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
Press
or
to select a
destination you want to send.
Press Enter.
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN Number, enter the 4-digit
PIN Number for the destination PC on the control panel.
Press Enter.
The machine will start the scanning process.
Max. 25 clients can be connected to one machine on a Network.
For example, if 30 clients try to connect at a time, 5 clients will
not be shown on the LCD.
19 - 8 NETWORK SCANNING (WINDOWS® 98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND XP ONLY)
20 Network PC-FAX software
To use the machine as a Network PC-FAX, the NC-9100h Network
board should be installed into the machine and configured with
TCP/IP and mail server settings if you use Scan to E-mail (E-mail
server). (See Using PC-FAX software on page 17-1.)
Enable Network PC-FAX
To use the machine for Network PC-FAX, see Using PC-FAX
software on page 17-1.
The items described below are specific items relating to the
Network version of PC-FAX software that is installed from the
"Optional network applications" on the CD-ROM supplied with
your machine.
Network PC-FAX can be configured through PC-FAX Setup,
Sending tab.
Sending setup
In order to use the full functionality of Network PC-FAX it is strongly
recommended that you enable the Network PC-FAX Setup option on
the Sending tab PC-FAX Setup.
1
Access the Sending Tab from the PC-FAX dialog box by
clicking
.
—OR—
From the Start menu, select All programs, Imagistics,
Multi-Function Suite, and then select PC-FAX Setup.
NETWORK PC-FAX SOFTWARE 20 - 1
2
Check Enable box.
This software can be used in a network environment and with a
locally connected machine. It is important that when used in a
network environment the Network PC Fax is set to enable.
20 - 2 NETWORK PC-FAX SOFTWARE
Extra options in Address Book
When the Enable Network PC-FAX option is selected, three
additional options appear in the address book contact window.
1 In the Address Book dialog box, click the icon to add a
member.
The Address Book Member Setup dialog box will appear:
2
3
4
In the Address Book Member Setup dialog box, type the
member's information.
Name is required field. You can also enter an E-mail contact
address and machine address for the address book member.
To send to this contact it is necessary to specify which is the
preferred method of sending a document to this contact by
checking the Fax, E-mail or MFC E-mail Address box next to
the contact.
Click the OK button to save the member's information.
If you wish to send a document to this contact by more than one
method you must create a second contact and select a different
option, Fax, E-Mail or machine Address.
NETWORK PC-FAX SOFTWARE 20 - 3
Installing Network PC-FAX
Insert the CD-ROM supplied with your machine, the installer screen
will automatically start. From the installer screen select your model
and language (if these options are present), then select Network
Applications for (optional NC-9100h Print / Fax Server), then select
PC-FAX and follow the screen prompts. When prompted reboot your
PC.
Windows® 95/98/98SE and Me users
It is now necessary to install the Network Print Software from the
CD-ROM so you need to reinsert the CD-ROM. Select Network
Applications for (optional NC-9100h Print / Fax Server), then select
Network Print Software. Follow the screen prompts, you will
prompted for the IP address of the NC-9100h. If in any doubt contact
your Network Administrator.
To check select Start, Settings and Printers
Highlight the PC-FAX driver from the list and right click the mouse
button and select Properties then select the Ports tab.
Select the “Print to Following Port” as illustrated above, if LPR Port
is listed for ix2700 you can just specify for Network Fax to use this
previously installed port. If you have multiple LPR ports please
ensure that you select the correct port address. If in any doubt please
contact your Network Administrator.
If the installer screen does not appear automatically select
Start, Run and type X:/setup.exe
(X:/ should be the drive letter of your CD ROM drive on your PC).
20 - 4 NETWORK PC-FAX SOFTWARE
Using the Network PC-FAX software
The Network PC-FAX feature allows you to use your PC to send any
application or document file as a standard fax. You can create a file
in any application on your PC, and then send it as a Network
PC-FAX. You can even attach a cover page note. All you have to do
is set up the receiving parties as Members or Groups in your PC-FAX
Address Book or simply enter the destination address or fax number
into the User Interface. You can use the Address Book Search
feature to quickly find members to send your fax.
Quick Tips:
Please see Enable Network PC-FAX on page 20-1 before using
Network PC-FAX.
1 Ensure that Network PC-FAX is set to “Enable” in the Sending
tab of Setup. (See Enable Network PC-FAX on page 20-1.)
NETWORK PC-FAX SOFTWARE 20 - 5
2
3
4
To send an E-mail from Network PC-FAX you can either enter
the E-mail address in the To: field or in the display for Facsimile
Style using the PC keyboard or select the member from the
Address Book. The member must have E-mail selected as the
chosen destination for that member.
To send an Internet Fax from Network PC-FAX you can either
enter the Internet Fax address in the To: field or in the display
for Facsimile style using the PC keyboard or select the member
from the Address Book. The member must have machine Mail
Address selected as the chosen destination for that member.
To send a Network Fax simply select a member from the
address book or enter the fax number into the User Interface
with the PC keyboard. The member must have Fax selected as
the chosen destination for that member.
Sending a Network PC-Fax to an E-mail address or sending an
Internet Fax requires SMTP/POP3 mail server support.
Sending a Network PC-FAX from your Macintosh®
application
You can send a fax directly from your Macintosh® application using
the following steps:
For Mac OS 8.6-9.2 users
1
2
Follow the steps on pages 46 and 47 in the Quick Setup Guide.
Follow the steps on pages 18-15 and 18-16.
For Mac OS X users
1
2
Follw the steps on pages 48 and 49 in the Quick Setup Guide.
Follow the steps on pages 18-17 to 18-20.
20 - 6 NETWORK PC-FAX SOFTWARE
21 Important information
Standard telephone and FCC Notices
These notices are in effect on models sold and
used only in the United States.
When programming emergency numbers or making test calls to
emergency numbers:
■ Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the
reason for the call before hanging up.
■ Perform these activities in the off-peak hours, such as early
morning or late evening.
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the
requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the backside of this
equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a
product identifier in the format US: AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested,
this number must be provided to the telephone company.
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone line by
means of a standard modular jack, USOC RJ11C.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises
wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC
Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant
telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is
designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also
compliant. See installation instructions for details.
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be
connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line
may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call.
In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five
(5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected
to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local
telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the
REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the
format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.The digits represented by ## are the
REN without a decimal point (e.g., 06 is a REN of 0.6). For earlier
products, the REN is separately shown on the label.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION 21 - 1
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the
telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary
discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice
isn’t practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as
soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a
complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities,
equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation
of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will provide
advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to
maintain uninterrupted service.
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty
information, please contact an Imagistics Authorized Service Center.
If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the
telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment
until the problem is resolved.
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the
state public utility commission, public service commission or
corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the
telephone line, ensure the installation of this equipment does not
disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will
disable alarm equipment, call your telephone company or a qualified
installer.
WARNING
For protection against the risk of electrical shock, always disconnect
all cables from the wall outlet before servicing, modifying or installing
the equipment.
This equipment may not be used on coin service lines provided by
the telephone company or connected to party lines.
Imagistics cannot accept any financial or other responsibilities that
may be the result of your use of this information, including direct,
special or consequential damages. There are no warranties
extended or granted by this document.
21 - 2 IMPORTANT INFORMATION
WARNING
This machine has been certified to comply with FCC standards,
which are applied to the USA only. A grounded plug should be
plugged into a grounded AC outlet after checking the rating of the
local power supply for the machine to operate properly and safely.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Declaration of Conformity (USA only)
Responsible Party: Imagistics International, Inc.
100 Oakview Drive Trumbull, CT 06611, U.S.A.
TEL: (800) 290-7860
declares, that the products
Product Name: ix2700
comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
■ Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
■ Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
■ Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
■ Call the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION 21 - 3
Important
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Imagistics
International, Inc could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Important – about the interface cable
A shielded interface cable should be used to ensure compliance with
the limits for a Class B digital device.
Industry Canada Compliance Statement
(Canada only)
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme
NMB-003 du Canada.
International ENERGY STAR® Compliance Statement
The purpose of the International ENERGY STAR® Program is to
promote the development and popularization of energy-efficient
office equipment.
As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Imagistics International, Inc. has
determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR® guidelines for
energy efficiency.
Laser safety
This equipment is certified as a Class I laser product under the U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation
Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health
and Safety Act of 1968. This means that the equipment does not
produce hazardous laser radiation.
21 - 4 IMPORTANT INFORMATION
Since radiation emitted inside the equipment is completely confined
within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam
cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation.
FDA regulations
U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has implemented
regulations for laser products manufactured on and after August 2,
1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United
States. The following label on the back of the machine indicates
compliance with the FDA regulations and must be attached to laser
products marketed in the United States.
Manufactured:
Imagistics International, Inc. 100 Oakview Drive Trumbull, CT
006611, U.S.A.
This product complies with FDA radiation performance standards,
21 CFR Subchapter J.
WARNING
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous invisible
radiation exposure.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Imagistics
International, Inc. may void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Internal laser radiation
Max. Radiation Power
Wave Length
Laser Class
5 mW
760 - 810 nm
Class IIIb (Accordance with 21 CFR
Part 1040.10)
IMPORTANT INFORMATION 21 - 5
Important safety instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Read all of these instructions.
Save them for later reference.
Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.
Switch off before cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners.
Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
Do not use this product near water.
Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table.
The product may fall, causing serious damage to the product.
Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are
provided for ventilation; to ensure reliable operation of the
product and to protect it from overheating, these openings must
not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be
blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other
similar surface. This product should never be placed near or
over a radiator or heater. This product should never be placed
in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided.
This product should be operated from the type of power source
indicated on the label. If you are not sure of the type of power
available, call your dealer or local power company.
Use only the power cord supplied with this machine.
This product is equipped with a 3-wire grounded plug, a plug
having a third (grounded) pin. This plug will only fit into a
grounded power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable
to insert the plug into the outlet, call your electrician to replace
your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounded
plug.
Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not place
this product where people can walk on the cord.
If an extension cord is used with this product, make sure that the
total ampere ratings on the products plugged into the extension
cord do not exceed the extension cord ampere rating. Also,
make sure that the total of all products plugged into the wall
outlet does not exceed 15 amperes (USA only).
Do not place anything in front of the machine that will block
received faxes. Do not place anything in the path of received faxes.
21 - 6 IMPORTANT INFORMATION
13
14
15
16
17
Wait until pages have exited the machine before picking them
up.
Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet
slots, since they may touch dangerous voltage points or short
out parts resulting in the risk of fire or electric shock. Never spill
liquid of any kind on the product. Do not attempt to service this
product yourself because opening or removing covers may
expose you to dangerous voltage points and other risks and
may void your warranty. Refer all servicing to the Imagistics
National Diagnostic Center.
Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to
Authorized Service Personnel under the following conditions:
■ When the power cord is damaged or frayed.
■ If liquid has been spilled into the product.
■ If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
■ If the product does not operate normally when the operating
instructions are followed. Adjust only those controls that are
covered by the operating instructions. Improper adjustment
of other controls may result in damage and will often require
extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the
product to normal operation.
■ If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been
damaged.
■ If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance,
indicating a need for service.
To protect your product against power surges, we recommend
the use of a power protection device (Surge Protector).
To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons,
note the following:
■ Do not use this product near appliances that use water, a
swimming pool or in a wet basement.
■ Do not use the machine’s telephone during an electrical
storm (there is the remote possibility of an electrical shock)
or to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
■ Use only the power cord indicated in this manual.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION 21 - 7
Trademarks
Imagistics is a registered trademark of Imagistics International, Inc.
The Imagistics logo is a registered trademark of Imagistics
International, Inc.
© Copyright 2003 Imagistics International, Inc. All rights reserved.
Windows, Microsoft and Windows NT are registered trademarks of
Microsoft in the U.S. and other countries.
Macintosh, QuickDraw, iMac and iBook are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
Postscript and Postscript Level 3 are registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
PaperPort and TextBridge are registered trademarks of ScanSoft, Inc.
Presto! PageManager is a registered trademark of NewSoft
Technology Corporation.
Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has
a Software License Agreement specific to its proprietary programs.
All other brand and product names mentioned in this User’s
Guide are registered trademarks of their respective companies.
21 - 8 IMPORTANT INFORMATION
and routine
22 Troubleshooting
maintenance
Troubleshooting
IMPORTANT
For technical help, you must call the country where you bought the
machine. Calls must be made from within that country.
Error messages
As with any sophisticated office product, errors may occur. If this
happens, your machine identifies the problem and displays an error
message. The most common error messages are shown below.
You can correct most problems by yourself.
ERROR MESSAGES
ERROR
MESSAGE
CAUSE
ACTION
Change Drum
The drum unit is the end of its life.
Replace the drum unit with a new
one and reset the drum counter.
Change Drum
Soon
The drum unit is near the end of its life.
Use the drum unit until you have a
print quality problem; then replace
the drum unit with a new one.
The drum counter was not reset.
1. Open the front cover, and then
press Clear/Back .
2. Press 1 to reset.
Check
Original
The originals were not inserted or fed
properly, or original scanned from ADF was
longer than about 36 inches (90cm).
See Original jams on page 22-4.
Check Paper
Upper Tray Empty
Lower Tray Empty
The machine is out of paper or paper is not
properly loaded in the paper tray.
Refill the paper in the paper tray or
MP tray.
—OR—
Remove the paper and load it again.
Check Paper MP
Paper in the MP tray runs out.
Reload paper.
Check Paper
Size
When you see this error, the paper in the paper
tray does not match the paper size you set in
Load the appropriate size paper or
change the default setting. (See
Setting the Mode Timer on page
4-5.)
Menu, 1, 3.
Check Scan
Lock
The scanner lock is locked.
Release the scanner lock lever, and
then press Stop.
TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 1
ERROR MESSAGES
ERROR
MESSAGE
CAUSE
ACTION
Comm. Error
Poor phone line quality caused
communication error.
Try the call again. If problem
continues, call Telephone Company
to check your phone line.
Connection
Fail
You tried to poll a fax machine that is not in
Polled Waiting mode.
Verify the other party’s polling setup.
Cover Open
PLS Close
Cover
The front cover was not completely closed.
Close the front cover for the drum
unit.
Disconnected
The other party or other party’s fax machine
terminated the call.
Try to transmit or receive again.
DX Lever
Error
The paper adjustment lever for duplex
printing is not correctly set for the paper size.
Set the duplex lever to the correct
position.
Face Up Open
The face-up output tray is open.
Please close the face-up output tray.
Fuser Open
The fuser cover is open.
Please close the jam clear cover.
(See Paper jams on page 22-9.)
Machine Error
XX
Machine has a mechanical problem.
Call the Imagistics National
Diagnostic Center:
In USA:
1-800-243-5556
22 - 2 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
ERROR MESSAGES
ERROR
MESSAGE
CAUSE
ACTION
Out Of Memory
You can’t store data in the memory.
(Fax sending in process)
Press Stop and wait until the other
operations in progress finish and
then try again.
—OR—
Clear the data in the memory. (See
Out of Memory message on page
10-5.)
(Copy operation in process)
Press Stop and wait until the other
operations in process finish and
then try again.
—OR—
Clear the data in the memory. (See
Out of Memory message on page
10-5.)
—OR—
Add an optional memory. (See
Memory board on page 23-1.)
(Printing operation in process)
Reduce print resolution. (See Print
Quality on page 12-5.)
—OR—
Clear the data in the memory. (See
Out of Memory message on page
10-5.)
—OR—
Add an optional memory. (See
Memory board on page 23-1.)
Please Wait
Wait For A
While
The temperature of the drum unit or toner
cartridge is too hot. The machine will pause
its current print job and go in to cooling down
mode. During the cooling down mode, you will
hear the cooling fan running while the display
on the machine shows Please Wait, and
Wait For A While.
You must wait 20 minutes for it to
cool.
No
Response/Busy
The number you dialed does not answer or is
busy.
Verify the number and try again.
Not
Registered
You tried to access a One-Touch or Speed
Dial number that is not programmed.
Set up the One-Touch or Speed Dial
number. (See Storing One-Touch
Dial numbers on page 7-1 and
Storing Speed Dial numbers on
page 7-2.)
TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 3
ERROR MESSAGES
ERROR
MESSAGE
CAUSE
ACTION
Pls Open
Cover
A page, piece of paper or paper clip, etc. may
be jammed inside the machine.
Open the front cover. If you see any
jammed paper or other item, gently
pull it out, then close the front cover.
If the error message remains, open
and close the front cover again.
If the machine cannot reset itself
and return to the date and time
prompt, it will display Machine
Error XX.
Please call the Imagistics National
Diagnostic Center:
In USA:
1-800-243-5556
No DX Tray
You tried to make duplex printing with duplex
cover open.
Install the duplex tray correctly.
Paper Jam
The paper is jammed in the machine.
See Paper jams on page 22-6 or
Paper is jammed in the duplex tray
on page 22-11.
Toner Empty
Toner cartridge is not installed.
—OR—
Toner is used up and printing is not possible.
Reinstall the toner cartridge.
—OR—
Replace the toner cartridge with a
new one. (See Replacing the toner
cartridge on page 22-27.)
Toner Low
If the LCD shows Toner Low, you can still
print.
But the toner is depleted and the machine is
telling you that the toner will soon run out.
Order a new toner cartridge now.
Original jams
Based upon where the original is jammed, follow the appropriate set
of instructions to remove it.
Original is jammed in the top of the ADF unit.
1
2
3
4
5
Take out any paper from
the ADF that is not
jammed.
Lift the ADF cover.
Pull the jammed original
out to the right.
Close the ADF cover.
Press Stop.
22 - 4 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
Original is jammed inside the ADF unit.
1
Take out any paper from
the ADF that is not
jammed.
2 Lift the document cover.
3 Pull the jammed original
out to the right.
4 Close the document
cover.
5 Press Stop .
—OR—
1 Take the ADF support out of the ADF unit.
2 Pull the jammed original out to the right.
3 Press Stop .
TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 5
Paper jams
To clear paper jams, please follow the steps in this section.
WARNING
After you have just used the machine, some parts inside the machine
are extremely hot. When you open the front cover or back output tray
of the machine, never touch the shaded parts shown in the following
diagram.
HOT!
Front view
HOT!
Back view
Clear the jammed paper as follows.
If the jammed paper is removed completely by using the information
in the following steps, you can install the paper tray first, and then
close the front cover and the machine will resume printing
automatically.
■ If a paper jam occurs when using the optional lower tray unit,
check for correct installation of the upper paper tray.
■ Always remove all paper from the paper tray and straighten
the stack when you add new paper. This helps prevent
multiple sheets of paper from feeding through the machine
at one time and reduces paper jams.
22 - 6 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
1
2
Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
Pull the jammed paper up and out of the machine.
3
4
Press the cover release button and then open the front cover.
Pull out the drum unit assembly. Pull the jammed paper up and
out of the machine. If you cannot remove the drum unit
assembly easily at this time, do not use extra force. Instead, pull
the edge of the jammed paper from the paper tray.
TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 7
WARNING
To prevent damage to the machine caused by static electricity, do
not touch the electrodes shown in the following diagram.
5
Open the back output tray. Pull the jammed paper out of the
fuser unit. If the paper jam can be cleared, go to Step 7.
If you have to pull the paper toward the back of the machine, the
fuser may get dirty with toner powder and it may scatter on the
next printouts. Print a few copies of the test page until the
scattering of toner stops.
22 - 8 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
WARNING
After you have just used the machine, some internal parts of the
machine are extremely HOT! Wait for the machine to cool down
before you touch the internal parts of the machine.
HOT!
Back view
6
Open the jam clear cover (fuser cover). Pull the jammed paper
out of the fuser unit.
Jam Clear Cover
(Fuser Cover)
7
Close the jam clear cover. Close the back output tray.
TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 9
8
9
10
11
Push the lock lever down and take the toner cartridge out of the
drum unit assembly. Take out the jammed paper if there is any
inside the drum unit.
Put the drum unit assembly back in the machine.
Put the paper tray in the machine.
Close the front cover.
22 - 10 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
Paper is jammed in the duplex tray
1
Pull the duplex tray and paper tray out of the machine.
2
Pull the jammed paper out of the machine.
3
Put the duplex tray and paper tray back into the machine.
TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 11
■ The Paper Jam message appears if you remove a sheet
of paper from the Face Down Output Tray after only one side
has printed.
■ If the Paper Adjustment Lever for Duplex Printing is not set
correctly for the paper size, paper jams may occur and the
printing will be out of position on the page. (See To use
Automatic Duplexing for fax, copy and print operations on
page 2-9.)
22 - 12 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
If you are having difficulty with your machine
If you think there is a problem with the way your faxes look, make a
copy first. If the copy looks good, the problem is probably not your
machine. Check the chart below and follow the troubleshooting tips.
DIFFICULTY
SUGGESTIONS
Printing or Receiving Faxes
Condensed print and
horizontal streaks or the top
and bottom of sentences are
cut off.
If your copy looks good, you probably had a bad connection, with static or
interference on the telephone line. If the copy looks bad, clean the scanner
area. If there is still problem, call the Imagistics National Diagnostic Center
at 1-800-243-5556.
Poor quality print.
See Improving the print quality on page 22-17.
Vertical black lines when
receiving.
Sometimes you may see vertical streaks/black lines on the faxes you
receive. Your machine’s primary corona wire for printing may be dirty,
or the sending party’s fax scanner may be dirty. Clean your primary
corona wire (See Cleaning the drum unit on page 22-26), or ask the
sender to make a copy to see if the problem is with the sending
machine. Try receiving from another fax machine. If the problem
continues, call the Imagistics National Diagnostic Center at
1-800-243-5556.
Horizontal streaks; lines are
missing.
You may get a fax with horizontal streaks or with missing lines. Usually
this is caused by a poor telephone connection. Ask the other party to
send the fax again.
Received faxes appear as split
or blank pages.
If the received data is divided and printed on two pages or if you get an
additional blank page, your Paper Size setting may not be correct for the
paper you are using (See Type and size of paper on page 2-1). Make
sure that auto reduction function setting is turned on. (See Printing a
reduced incoming fax (Auto Reduction) on page 5-5.)
Phone Line or Connections
Dialing does not work
Check for a dial tone. Change Tone/Pulse setting. (See Setting Tone
and Pulse dialing mode on page 4-4.) Check all line cord connections.
Check power cord connection. Send a manual fax by pressing Monitor,
or by lifting the external handset and dialing the number. Wait to hear
fax receiving tones before pressing Start.
The machine does not answer
when called.
Make sure the machine is in the correct receiving mode for your setup.
(See Basic sending operations on page 6-6.) Check for a dial tone. If
possible, call your machine to hear it answer. If there is still no answer,
check the telephone line cord connection. If there is no ringing when you
call your machine, ask your telephone company to check the line.
Sending Faxes
Poor sending quality.
Try changing your resolution to Fine or EX-Fine. Make a copy to
check your machine’s scanner operation. If copy quality is not good,
clean the scanner. (See Cleaning the scanner on page 22-24.)
Transmission Verification
Report says ‘RESULT:NG’ or
‘RESULT:ERROR’.
There is probably temporary noise or static on the line. Try sending the
fax again. If you send a PC FAX message and get ‘RESULT:NG’ or, on
the Transmission Verification Report, your machine may be out of
memory. To gain extra memory, you can turn off Fax Storage, print fax
messages in memory (See Polling on page 5-9) or cancel a Delayed
Fax or Polling Job (See Canceling a job while scanning the original on
page 6-11). If the problem continues, ask the telephone company to
check your phone line.
TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 13
DIFFICULTY
SUGGESTIONS
Vertical black lines when
sending.
If the copy you made shows the same problem, your scanner is dirty.
(See Cleaning the scanner on page 22-24.)
Handling Incoming Calls
Machine ‘Hears’ Voice as
CNG Tone.
If your machine is set to Easy Receive ON, it is more sensitive to
sounds. Your machine may mistakenly interpret certain voices or music
on the line as a calling fax machine and respond with fax receiving
tones. Deactivate the fax by pressing Stop. Try avoiding this problem by
turning Easy Receive to OFF. (See EXT. TEL. RX on page 5-4.)
Sending a Fax Call to the
machine.
If you answered at the machine, press Start and hang up immediately.
If you answered on an external or extension phone, press your Fax
Receive Code (default setting is ( 51). When your machine answers,
hang up.
Menu Setting Difficulties
The machine beeps when you
try to access the RX Settings
and TX Settings menus.
Make sure that machine is in Fax mode. If the Fax
key is not
illuminated, press it to turn on Fax mode. RX Setting (Menu, 2, 1) and
TX Setting (Menu, 2, 2) are available only when the machine is in Fax
mode.
Copy Quality Difficulties
Vertical streaks appear in
copies.
Sometimes you may see vertical streaks on your copies. Either the
scanner or the primary corona wire for printing is dirty. Clean them both.
(See Cleaning the scanner on page 22-24 and Cleaning the drum unit
on page 22-26.)
Printer Difficulties
The machine does not print.
Check the following:
• The machine is plugged in and the power switch turned On. (See the
Quick Setup Guide on page 7.)
• The toner cartridge and drum unit are installed properly. (See
Replacing the drum unit on page 22-33.)
• The interface cable is securely connected between the machine and
computer. (See the Quick Setup Guide.)
• Check to see if LCD is showing an error message. (See Error
messages on page 22-1.)
The machine prints
unexpectedly or it prints
garbage.
Reset the machine or turn it off and then on again. Check the primary
settings in your application software to make sure it is set up to work with
your machine.
The machine prints first couple
of pages correctly, then some
pages have text missing.
Your computer is not recognizing the printer’s input buffer full signal.
Please make sure to connect the machine cable correctly.
The machine cannot print full
pages of a document.
Out Of Memory message
occurs.
Reduce the printing resolution. Reduce the complexity of your
document and try again. Reduce the graphic quality or the number of
font sizes within your application software.
My headers or footers appear
when I view my document on
the screen but do not appear
when I print them.
Most laser printers have a restricted area that will not accept print.
Usually these are the first two lines and last two lines, leaves 62
printable lines. Adjust the top and bottom margins in your document to
allow for this.
Scanning Difficulties
TWAIN errors appear while
scanning.
Make sure the TWAIN driver is selected as the primary source. In
PaperPort®, click Scan in the File menu and select the TWAIN driver.
22 - 14 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
DIFFICULTY
SUGGESTIONS
Software Difficulties
Cannot perform ‘2 in 1 or 4 in 1’
printing.
Check that the paper size setting in the application and in the printer
driver are the same.
Cannot print when using
Adobe Illustrator.
Try to reduce the print resolution.
When using ATM fonts, some
characters are missing or
some characters are printed in
their place.
If you are using Windows® 95/98/98SE/Me, select ‘Printer Settings’ from
the ‘Start’ menu. Select the properties of the ‘Imagistics ix2700 (USB)
Printer’. Click ‘Spool Setting’ on the ‘Details’ tab. Select ‘RAW’ from
‘Spool Data Format.’
“Unable to write to LPT1” or
“LPT1 already in use” Error
Message appears.
1. Make sure the machine is on (plugged into the AC power outlet and
turned the power switch on) and that it is connected directly to the
computer using the bundled IEEE-1284 bi-directional parallel cable.
The cable must not go through another peripheral device (such as a
Zip Drive, External CD-ROM Drive, or Switch box).
2. Make sure the machine is not displaying an error message on the
LCD Display.
3. Make sure no other device drivers, which also communicate through
the parallel port, are running automatically when you boot up the
computer (such as, drivers for Zip Drives, External CD-ROM Drive,
etc.) Suggested areas to check: (Load=, Run=command lines in the
win.ini file or the Setup Group)
4. Check with you computer manufacturer to confirm that the computer’s
parallel port settings in the BIOS are set to support a bi-directional
machine; i.e. (Parallel Port Mode – ECP)
“MFC is Busy” Error Message
appears.
'MFC Connect Failure'
If the machine is not connected to your PC and you have loaded the
software, the PC will show 'Machine Connect Failure' each time you
restart Windows®. You can ignore this message or you can turn it off as
follows. Double-click "\tool\WarnOFF.REG" from the supplied CD-ROM.
The Scan key on the machine's control panel will not work unless you
restart your PC with the machine connected. To turn it back on,
Double-click "\tool\WarnON.REG" from the supplied CD-ROM.
Paper Handling Difficulties
The machine does not load
paper. The LCD shows Check
Paper or Paper Jam.
Check to see if the Check Paper or Paper Jam message appears on
the LCD. If it is empty, load a new stack of paper into the paper tray. If
there is paper in the paper tray, make sure it is straight. If the paper is
curled, you should straighten it. Sometimes it is helpful to remove the
paper, turn the stack over and put it back into the paper tray. Reduce the
amount of paper in the paper tray, and then try again. Check that the MP
tray or MP mode is not selected in the printer driver.
How can I load envelopes?
You can load envelopes from the MP tray. Your application software
must be set up to print the envelope size you are using. This is usually
done in the Page Setup or Document Setup menu of your software.
Refer to your software application manual.
What paper can I use?
You can use plain paper, envelopes, transparencies and labels that are
made for laser machines. (For information on paper you can use, see
Printer operation keys on page 11-11.)
How can I clear paper jams?
See Paper jams on page 22-6.
TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 15
DIFFICULTY
SUGGESTIONS
Print Quality Difficulties
Printed pages are curled.
Thin or thick paper below the standard can cause this problem. Make
sure you select the Paper Type that suits the media type you use. (See
Setting the Paper Type on page 4-5 and Media Type on page 12-4.)
Printed pages are smeared.
The Paper Type setting may be incorrect for the type of print media you
are using—OR—The print media may be too thick or have a rough
surface. (See Setting the Paper Type on page 4-5 and Media Type on
page 12-4.)
Printouts are too light.
Set Toner Save mode to off in the Advance tab in the printer driver. (See
Toner Save Mode on page 12-6.)
Network Difficulties
I cannot print over the Network
Make sure that your machine is powered on and is On Line and in
Ready mode. Press the Test switch. Then the current settings of the
Network board are printed.Verify that the cabling and Network
connections are good. If possible, try connecting the machine to a
different port on your hub using a different cable. Check to see if there
is any LED activity. The Network board has a two color LED for
diagnosing problems.
22 - 16 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
Improving the print quality
This section provides information on the following topics:
Examples of poor print
quality
Recommendation
Check the printer’s environment. Conditions such as humidity, high
temperatures, and so on may cause this print fault. (See Choosing a
location on page iii.)
If the whole page is too light, Toner Save mode may be on. Turn off
Toner Save mode in the printer Properties tab of the driver.
—OR—
If your machine is not connected to a computer, turn off Toner Save
mode in the machine itself. (See Save Toner on page 4-8.)
Try installing a new toner cartridge. (See Replacing the toner cartridge
on page 22-27.)
Try installing a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page
22-33.)
ABCDEFGH
CDEF
abcdefghijk
defg
ABCD
abcde
01234
Faint
ABCDEFGH
abcdefghijk
ABCD
abcde
01234
Gray background
Make sure that you use paper that meets the recommended
specifications. (See About paper on page 2-1.)
Check the printer’s environment - high temperatures and high humidity
can increase the amount of background shading. (See Choosing a
location on page iii.)
Use a new toner cartridge. (See Replacing the toner cartridge on page
22-27.)
Use a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 22-33.)
Make sure you use paper that meets our specifications. Rough-surfaced
paper or thick print media may cause this problem.
Make sure that you choose the appropriate media type in the printer
driver. (See About paper on page 2-1.)
Try using a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page
22-33.)
Ghost
ABCDEFGH
abcdefghijk
ABCD
abcde
01234
Toner specks
Hollow print
Make sure that you use paper that meets our specifications.
Rough-surfaced paper may cause the problem. (See About paper on
page 2-1.)
The drum unit may be damaged. Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing
the drum unit on page 22-33.)
Make sure that you use paper that meets our specifications. (See About
paper on page 2-1.)
Choose Thick paper mode in the printer driver, or use thinner paper
than you are currently using.
Check the printer’s environment because conditions such as high
humidity can cause hollow print. (See Choosing a location on page iii.)
You may clear the problem by cleaning the primary corona wire inside
the drum unit by sliding the blue tab. Make sure you return the blue tab
to the home position (▲ ). (See Cleaning the drum unit on page 22-26.)
The drum unit may be damaged. Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing
the drum unit on page 22-33.)
All black
TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 17
Examples of poor print
quality
Recommendation
If the problem is not solved after printing a few pages, the drum unit may
have glue from label stock on the OPC drum surface.
94 mm
(3.7 in.)
94 mm
(3.7 in.)
White Spots on black text
and graphics at 94 mm
(3.7 in.) intervals
Clean the drum unit as follows:
1 Position the print sample in front of the drum unit, and find the exact
position of the poor print.
94 mm
(3.7 in.)
94 mm
(3.7 in.)
Black Spots at 94 mm
(3.7 in.) intervals
2 Turn the drum unit gear by hand while looking at the surface of the
OPC drum.
Do not touch the photosensitive drum with your fingers.
Photosensitive drum
3 When you have located the mark on the drum that matches the print
sample, wipe the surface of the OPC drum with a cotton swab until
the dust or paper powder on the surface comes off.
Do not try to clean the surface of the photosensitive drum with a
sharp object, such as a ball-point pen, and so on.
The drum unit may be damaged. Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing
the drum unit on page 22-33.)
22 - 18 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
Examples of poor print
quality
ABCDEFGH
abcdefghijk
ABCD
abcde
01234
Black toner marks across
the page
ABCDEFGH
abcdefghijk
ABCD
abcde
01234
White lines across the page
Recommendation
The drum unit may be damaged. Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing
the drum unit on page 22-33.)
Make sure that you use paper that meets our specifications. (See About
paper on page 2-1.)
If you use label sheets for laser printers, the glue from the sheets may
sometimes stick to the OPC drum surface. Clean the drum unit. (See
Cleaning the drum unit on page 22-26.)
Do not use paper that has clips or staples because they will scratch the
surface of the drum.
If the unpacked drum unit is in direct sunlight or room light, the unit may
be damaged.
Make sure that you use paper that meets our specifications. A rough
surfaced paper or thick print media can cause the problem.
Make sure that you select the appropriate media type in the printer
driver.
The problem may disappear by itself. Try printing multiple pages to clear
this problem, especially if the printer has not been used for a long time.
The drum unit may be damaged. Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing
the drum unit on page 22-33.)
Clean the inside of the printer and the primary corona wire in the drum
unit. (See Cleaning the drum unit on page 22-26.)
The drum unit may be damaged. Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing
the drum unit on page 22-33.)
ABCDEFGH
abcdefghijk
ABCD
abcde
01234
Lines across the page
ABCDEFGH
abcdefghijk
ABCD
abcde
01234
Black lines down the page
Printed pages have toner
stains down the page.
Clean the primary corona wire of the drum unit.
Make sure the primary corona wire cleaner is at the home position (▲ ).
The drum unit may be damaged. Install a new drum unit. (See Replacing
the drum unit on page 22-33.)
The toner cartridge may be damaged. Put in a new toner cartridge. (See
Replacing the toner cartridge on page 22-27.) Make sure that a torn
piece of paper is not inside the printer covering the scanner window.
The fixing unit may be smudged. Call Customer Service.
You may clear the problem by wiping the scanner window with a soft
cloth. (See Cleaning the printer on page 22-25.)
The toner cartridge may be damaged. Put in a new toner cartridge. (See
Replacing the toner cartridge on page 22-27.)
ABCDEFGH
abcdefghijk
ABCD
abcde
01234
White lines down the page
GH
ABCDEF
ijk
abcdefgh
ABCD
abcde
01234
Page skewed
Curl or wave
Make sure the paper or other print media is loaded properly in the paper
tray and that the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper
stack.
Set the paper guides correctly.
If you are using the multi-purpose tray. (See How to load paper on page
2-5.)
The paper tray may be too full.
Check the paper type and quality. (See About paper on page 2-1.)
Check the paper type and quality. High temperatures and high humidity
will cause paper to curl.
If you don’t use the printer very often, the paper may have been in the
paper tray too long. Turn over the stack of paper in the paper tray. Also,
try fanning the paper stack and then rotating the paper 180° in the paper
tray.
Try printing using the straight-through output path. (See How to load
paper on page 2-5.)
TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 19
Examples of poor print
quality
B DEFGH
abc efghijk
A CD
bcde
1 34
Wrinkles or creases
Recommendation
Make sure that paper is loaded properly.
Check the paper type and quality. (See About paper on page 2-1.)
Try printing using the straight-through output path. (See How to load
paper on page 2-5.)
Turn over the stack of paper in the tray or try rotating the paper 180° in
the input tray.
The drum unit is a consumable item and it is necessary to
replace it periodically.
22 - 20 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
Packing and shipping the machine
Whenever you transport the machine, use the packing materials that
came with your machine. If you do not pack the machine correctly,
you may void your warranty.
1 Turn the machine power switch off.
2 Unplug the machine from the telephone wall jack.
3 Unplug the machine from the AC outlet.
Lock the Scanner Lock
4 Push the Scanner Lock Lever down to lock the scanner. This
lever is located on the left of the scanner glass.
Scanner Lock Lever
Caution
Damage caused to your machine by failure to lock the scanner
before moving and shipping may void your warranty.
5
Open the front cover.
TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 21
6
Remove the drum unit and toner cartridge assembly. Leave the
toner cartridge installed in the drum unit.
7
Place the drum unit and toner
cartridge assembly into the plastic bag
and seal the bag.
8
Close the front cover. Fold down the face-down output tray flap.
Remove the telephone line cord.
Wrap the machine in the plastic
bag and place it in the original
carton with the original packing
material.
9
22 - 22 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
10
Pack the drum unit and toner cartridge assembly, telephone line
cord, AC cord and printed materials in the original carton as
shown below:
11
Close the carton and tape it shut.
TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 23
Routine maintenance
Cleaning the scanner
Turn the machine power switch off and lift the document cover. Clean
the scanner glass and glass strip with dry cloth and the white film with
isopropyl alcohol on a lint free cloth.
White Film
Glass strip
Document Cover
White film
If the screen still displays a scanner error, call the Imagistics National
Diagnostic Center at 1-800-243-5556.
22 - 24 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
Cleaning the printer
Caution
■ Do not use isopropyl alcohol to remove dirt from the control
panel. It may crack the panel.
■ Do not use isopropyl alcohol to clean the laser scanner window.
■ Do not touch the scanner window with your finger.
■ The drum unit contains toner, so handle it carefully. If toner
scatters and your hands or clothes get dirty, immediately wipe or
wash it off with cold water.
1 Turn the machine power switch off and open the front cover.
2 Remove the drum unit and toner cartridge assembly.
WARNING
Just after you have used the machine, some internal parts of the
machine are extremely HOT! When you open the front cover of the
machine, never touch the shaded parts shown in the diagram below.
HOT!
Front view
3
Gently clean the scanner window by wiping it with a clean soft
dry cloth. Do not use isoproply alcohol.
Laser Scanner
Window
TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 25
Cleaning the drum unit
We recommend placing the drum unit and toner cartridge assembly
on a cloth or large disposable paper to avoid spilling and scattering
toner.
1 Clean the primary corona wire inside the drum unit by gently
sliding the blue tab from right to left several times.
2 Return the blue tab and snap it into the Home position (▼).
Home Position(▼)
Tab
Corona Wire
Caution
If the blue tab is not at Home position (▼), printed pages may have
vertical stripes.
3 Reinstall the drum unit and toner cartridge assembly into the
machine.
(See Replacing the drum unit on page 22-33.)
4 Close the front cover.
5 Plug in the power cord first, then the telephone cord.
22 - 26 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
Replacing the toner cartridge
When the toner cartridge is running low, the LCD shows Toner Low.
It is a good idea to keep a new toner cartridge ready for use
when you see the Toner Low warning.
Discard the used toner cartridge according to local regulations,
keeping it separate from domestic waste. Be sure to seal the toner
cartridge tightly so toner powder does not spill out of the cartridge. If
you have questions, call your local waste disposal office.
We recommend that you clean the machine when you replace the
toner cartridge.
TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 27
How to replace the toner cartridge
WARNING
Just after you use the machine, some internal parts of the machine
will be extremely HOT! So, never touch the shaded parts shown in
the illustration.
HOT!
1
Open the front cover and pull out the drum unit.
Caution
■ Place the drum unit on a drop cloth or large piece of disposable
paper to avoid spilling and scattering the toner.
■ To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, do not
touch the electrodes shown below.
22 - 28 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
2
Hold down the lock lever on the right and pull the toner cartridge
out of the drum unit.
Lock Lever
Caution
Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If toner scatters on your hands
or clothes, immediately wipe it off or wash it with cold water.
TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 29
3
Unpack the new toner cartridge. Place the used toner cartridge
into the aluminum bag and discard it according to local
regulations.
Caution
■ Wait to unpack the toner cartridge until immediately before you
install it in the machine. If a toner cartridge is left unpacked for a
long period of time, the toner life is shortened.
■ Imagistics strongly recommends that you do not refill the toner
cartridge provided with your machine. We also strongly
recommend that you continue to use only Genuine Imagistics
replacement toner cartridges (484-5). Using or attempting to use
potentially incompatible toner and/or toner cartridges in your
machine may cause damage to the machine itself and/or it may
result in unsatisfactory print quality. Our warranty coverage does
not apply to any problem that was caused by the use of
unauthorized third party toner and toner cartridges. To protect
your investment and guarantee your print quality please continue
to replace consumed toner cartridges with only Genuine
Imagistics Branded Supplies.
4
Gently rock the toner cartridge from side to side five or six times
to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge.
22 - 30 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
5
Remove the protective cover.
6
Insert the new toner cartridge in the drum unit until it clicks into
place. If you put it in properly, the lock lever will lift automatically.
Drum Unit
Toner Cartridge
7
Clean the primary corona wire inside the drum unit by gently
sliding the blue tab from right to left several times. Return the
blue tab to the Home position (▼) before reinstalling the drum
unit and toner cartridge assembly.
Home Position(▼)
Tab
Corona Wire
TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 31
8
Reinstall the drum unit and toner cartridge assembly and close
the front cover.
22 - 32 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
Replacing the drum unit
The machine uses a drum unit to create print images on paper. If the
LCD shows Change Drum Soon, the drum unit is near the end of
its life and it is time to purchase a new one.
Even if the LCD shows Change Drum Soon, you may be able to
continue printing without having to replace the drum unit for a while.
However, if there is a noticeable deterioration in the output print
quality (even before Change Drum Soon appears), then the drum
unit should be replaced. You should clean the machine when you
replace the drum unit. (See Cleaning the drum unit on page 22-26.)
Caution
When removing the drum unit, handle it carefully because it contains
toner. If toner scatters and your hands or clothes get dirty,
immediately wipe or wash with cold water.
The drum unit is a consumable item, and it is necessary to
replace it periodically. There are many factors that determine
the actual drum life, such as temperature, humidity, type of
paper and how much toner you use for the number of pages per
print job. Because we have no control over the many factors that
determine the actual drum life, we cannot guarantee a minimum
number of pages that will be printed by your drum.
WARNING
Just after you have used the machine, some internal parts of the
machine are extremely HOT! So please be careful.
HOT!
TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 33
Follow these steps to replace the drum unit:
1 Press the cover release button and then open the front cover.
2 Remove the old drum unit and toner cartridge assembly. Place
it on a drop cloth or disposable paper to avoid scattering toner.
Caution
To prevent damage to the printer from static electricity, do not touch
the electrodes shown below.
22 - 34 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
3
Hold down the lock lever on the right and pull the toner cartridge
out of the drum unit. (See Replacing the toner cartridge on page
22-27.)
Lock Lever
Discard the used drum unit according to local regulations,
keeping it separate from domestic waste. Be sure to seal the
drum unit tightly so toner powder does not spill out of the unit. If
you have questions, call your local waste disposal office.
4
5
6
7
8
Wait to unpack the new drum unit until immediately before
installing it. Place the old drum unit into the plastic bag and
discard it according to local regulations.
Reinstall the toner cartridge into the new drum unit. (See
Replacing the toner cartridge on page 22-27.)
Reinstall the new drum unit, keeping the front cover open.
Press Clear/Back.
Press 1 and when the LCD shows
Replace Drum
Accepted, and close the front
▲ 1.Yes
cover.
▼
Caution
2.No
Set ▲ ▼ & Enter
If toner scatters and your hands or clothes get dirty, immediately
wipe off or wash with cold water.
TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 35
Page Counter
You can see number of total pages, copy pages, print pages and
List/Fax (total fax print + total list print) pages that your machine has
printed.
1
2
3
4
Press Menu.
Press Start.
The LCD shows number of pages
for Total, Copy,Print and
List/Fax.
Press Stop.
Total
:123456
Copy
:120002
Print
:003000
List/Fax:000454
—OR—
1
2
3
Press Menu, 2, 0, 2.
The LCD shows number of pages
for Total and Copy.
Press
to see Print and
List/Fax.
Press Stop.
20.Miscellaneous
2.Page Counter
▲
Total
:123456
▼
Copy
:120002
22 - 36 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
23 Optional accessories
Memory board
The memory board is installed on the main controller board inside the
machine. When you add the optional memory board, it increases the
performance for both copier and printer operations.
Optional Memory
32MB TECHWORKS 12457-0001
64MB TECHWORKS 12458-0001
128MB TECHWORKS 12459-0001
In general, the DIMM must have the following specifications:
Type:
100 pin and 32 bit output
CAS Lantency:
2 or 3
Clock Frequency:
100MHz or more
Capacity:
32, 64, 128MB
Height:
35mm (1.4 inches) or less
Parity:
NONE
DRAM Type:
SDRAM 4 Bank
Some DIMMs might not work with this machine.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 23 - 1
Installing the optional memory board
WARNING
■ DO NOT touch the surface of the main board within 15 minutes
after turning off the power.
■ Before installing the optional memory board, make sure there are
no faxes in the memory.
1 Disconnect the telephone line cord, turn the machine power
switch off, unplug the machine power cord from the AC outlet,
and then disconnect the interface cable.
WARNING
Turn the machine power switch off, before installing (or removing)
the memory board.
2
Remove the side cover. Loosen the two screws, and then
remove the metal shield plate.
3
Unpack the DIMM and hold it by the edges.
23 - 2 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
WARNING
DIMM boards can be damaged by even a small amount of static
electricity. Do not touch the memory chips or the board surface.
Wear an antistatic wrist strap when you install or remove the board.
If you do not have an antistatic wrist strap, frequently touch the bare
metal on the printer.
4 Hold the DIMM with your fingers on the side edges and your
thumb on the back edge. Line up the notches on the DIMM with
the DIMM slot. (Check that the locks on each side of the DIMM
slot are open or facing outwards.)
5
6
7
8
9
10
Press the DIMM straight into the slot (press firmly). Make sure
the locks on each side of the DIMM click into place. (To remove
a DIMM, you must release the locks.)
Put the metal plate back on and secure the metal plate with the
two screws.
Put the side cover back on.
Reconnect the telephone line cord.
Reconnect any additional interface cables that you removed.
Reconnect the power cable and then turn on the machine power
switch.
■ To check that you have installed the DIMM correctly, print
the printer settings by using the selection in the driver and
check the printout to make sure it shows the additional
memory.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 23 - 3
WARNING
If the Status LED turns Red for a Service Error, please call the
Imagistics National Diagnostic Center at: 1-800-243-5556.
Network (LAN) board
When you add the optional Network (LAN) Board, you can connect
your machine into the network to use the Internet FAX, Network
Scanner, Network Printer and Network Management operations.
WARNING
DO NOT touch the surface of the main board within 15 minutes after
turning off the power.
For more details about how to configure the Network board, please
see the Network User's Guide on the CD-ROM supplied with the
machine.
Network board
(Print/Fax Server)
23 - 4 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Before starting installation
Be careful when handling the Network board. There are many
delicate electronic components that are susceptible to damage from
static electricity. To avoid such damage, use the following
precautions when handling the board.
■ Leave the Network board in its anti-static bag until you are ready
to install it.
■ Make sure that you are adequately grounded before touching the
Network board. Use an anti-static wrist strap and a grounding mat
if possible. If you do not have an anti-static wrist strap, touch the
bare metal surface on the back of the machine before handling
the Network board.
■ Avoid moving around the work area in order to eliminate static
charge build-up.
■ If possible, do not work on a carpeted area.
■ Do not flex the board and do not touch the components on the
card.
Tools Required:
Phillips Screwdriver
Step 1: Hardware installation
WARNING
DO NOT touch the surface of the main boards within 15 minutes after
turning off the power.
1
Disconnect the telephone line cord, turn the machine power
switch off, unplug the machine power cord from the AC outlet,
and then disconnect the interface cable.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 23 - 5
WARNING
Turn the machine power switch off, before installing (or removing)
the Network board.
2
Remove the side cover. Loosen the two screws, and then
remove the metal shield plate.
3
Loosen the two screws, and then remove the metal cover plate.
Cover Plate
23 - 6 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
4
Plug the Network board into connector P1 located on the main
board as shown in the illustration (press firmly) and secure the
Network board with the two screws.
5
Put the metal shield plate back on and secure it with the two
screws.
Put the side cover back on.
Reconnect the telephone line cord.
Reconnect any additional interface cables that you removed.
Reconnect the power cable and then turn on the machine power
switch.
Press the Test switch and print a network configuration page.
(See TEST SWITCH on page 23-9.)
6
7
8
9
10
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 23 - 7
Step 2: Connecting the Network board to an
Unshielded Twisted Pair 10BASE-T or
100BASE-TX Ethernet Network
To connect the Network board to a 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX
Network, you must have an Unshielded Twist Pair Cable. One side
of the cable must be connected to a free port on your Ethernet hub
and the other side must be connected to the 10BASE-T or
100BASE-TX connector (an RJ45 Connector) of the Network board.
Verifying successful hardware Installation:
Plug in the AC power cord. After initialization and warm-up (this may
take several seconds), the machine will come to a Ready state.
LED
No light:
If both of the two LEDs are off, then the print server is not connected
to the network.
Link/Speed LED is orange: Fast Ethernet
This Link/Speed LED will be orange if the print server is connected
to a 100BASETX Fast Ethernet network.
Link/Speed LED is green: 10 BASE T Ethernet
This Link/Speed LED will be green if the print server is connected to
a 10 BASE T Ethernet.
23 - 8 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Active LED is yellow:
The Active LED will blink if the print server is receiving or transmitting data.
If there is a valid connection to the network, the LED will blink
orange or green.
TEST SWITCH
Short push: Prints the network configuration page.
Long push (more than 5 seconds): Reset the network configuration
back to the factory default settings.
Test Switch
LED
Ethernet
RJ-45
LED
To set up the machine on the Network, see the Network User’s
Guide on the CD-ROM.
Lower Tray
You can purchase the Lower Tray accessory (6429779) to use as a third
paper source. Lower Tray holds up to 250 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m2)
paper.
Lower Tray
Holds approx. 250 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m2)
Basis Weight
16 to 28 lb (60 to 105 g/m2)
Moisture Content
4% to 6% by weight
We Recommend:
Cut sheet:
Xerox 4200 DP 20 lb
Hammermill Laser Paper 24 lb
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 23 - 9
G Glossary
ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) The original can be placed in
the ADF and scanned one page at a time automatically.
Automatic fax transmission Sending a fax without picking up the
handset of an external phone (or pressing Monitor).
Automatic Redial A feature that enables your machine to redial the
last fax number if the fax did not go through because the line was
busy.
Auto Reduction Reduces the size of incoming faxes.
Batch Transmission As a cost savings feature, all delayed faxes to
the same fax number will be sent as one transmission.
Beeper The sound the keys make when they are pressed, an error
occurs, or a fax has been received or sent.
Beeper volume Volume setting for the beep when you press a key
or make an error.
Broadcasting The ability to send the same fax message to more
than one location.
Caller ID A subscriber service purchased from the Telephone
Company that lets you see the number (or name) of the party
calling you. Your machine stores the latest callers so you can print
a Log and view caller information.
CNG tones The special tones (beeps) sent by fax machines during
automatic transmission to tell the receiving machine that they are
from a fax machine.
Communication error (or Comm. Error) An error during fax
sending or receiving, usually caused by line noise or static.
GLOSSARY G - 1
Coding Method Method of coding the information contained in the
original. All fax machines must use a minimum standard of
Modified Huffman (MH). Your machine is capable of greater
compression methods, Modified Read (MR), Modified Modified
Read (MMR) and JBIG, if the receiving machine has the same
capability.
Compatibility Group The ability of one fax unit to communicate
with another. Compatibility is assured between ITU-T Groups.
Contrast Setting to compensate for dark or light originals, by
making faxes or copies of dark originals lighter and light originals
darker.
Cover Sheet Prints a page at the other party’s fax machine that
contains the sender and recipient’s name and fax number,
number of pages and comment. You can generate an electronic
cover sheet at the other end with pre-programmed information
from memory or you can print a sample cover sheet to fax with
your original.
Cover Sheet Message The comment that is on the Cover Sheet.
This is a programmable feature.
Delayed Send Sends your fax at a later time that day.
Dialer Directory A listing of names and numbers stored in
One-Touch and Speed Dial memory, in numerical order.
Drum Unit A printing device for the machine.
Dual Access Your machine can scan outgoing faxes or scheduled
jobs into memory at the same time it is sending a fax or receiving
or printing an incoming fax.
ECM (Error Correction Mode) Detects errors during fax
transmission and resends the pages of the fax that had an error.
EXT. TEL. RX Enables your machine to respond to CNG tones if
you interrupt a fax call by answering it.
G - 2 GLOSSARY
Extension phone A telephone on the fax number that is plugged
into a separate wall jack.
External phone A TAM (telephone answering device) or telephone
that is plugged into the EXT jack of your machine.
F/T Ring Time The length of time that the machine rings (when the
Receive Mode setting is Fax/Tel) to notify you to pick up a voice
call that it answered.
Fax Forwarding Sends a fax received into the memory to another
preprogrammed fax number.
Fax Receive Code Press this code ( 51) when you answer a fax
call from an extension or external phone to transfer the call to the
machine.
Fax Storage You can print stored faxes later, or retrieve them from
another location using Fax Forwarding or Remote Retrieval
operations.
Fax/Tel You can receive faxes and telephone calls. Do not use this
mode if you are using a telephone answering device (TAM).
Fax tones The signals sent by sending and receiving fax machines
while communicating information.
Fine resolution Resolution is 203 × 196 dpi. It is used for small print
and graphs.
Gray scale The shades of gray available for copying and faxing
photographs.
Group number A combination of One-Touch, Speed Dial numbers
that are stored as a Speed Dial number for Broadcasting.
Help list A printout of the complete feature that you can use to
program your machine when you do not have the User’s Guide with
you.
Interval The preprogrammed time period between automatically
printed Journal. You can print Journal on demand without
interrupting this cycle.
Job Status Report A listing for each transmission, that shows its
date, time and number.
Journal Report Lists information about the last 200 incoming and
outgoing faxes. TX means Transmit. RX means Receive.
GLOSSARY G - 3
LCD (liquid crystal display) The display screen on the machine
that shows interactive messages during On-Screen Programming
and shows the date and time when the machine is idle.
Machine ID The stored information that appears on the top of faxed
pages. It includes the sender’s name and fax number.
Machine Settings List A printed report that shows the current
settings of your machine.
Manual fax When you lift the handset of your external telephone or
press Monitor so you can hear the receiving fax machine answer
before you press Start to begin transmission.
Menu mode Programming mode for changing your machine’s
settings.
Multi-Function Suite Turns your machine into a printer and a
scanner and enables PC faxing using the machine.
OCR (optical character recognition) The bundled ScanSoft®
TextBridge® software application converts an image of text to text
you can edit.
One-Touch Keys on the machine control panel where you can store
numbers for easy dialing. You can store a second number on
each key if you press Shift and the One-Touch key together.
Out of Paper Reception Receives faxes into the machine’s
memory when the machine is out of paper.
Overseas Mode Makes temporary changes to the fax tones to
accommodate noise and static on overseas phone lines.
Pause Allows you to place a 3.5 second delay in the dialing
sequence stored on Speed Dial numbers. Press Pause as many
times as needed for longer pauses.
Photo resolution A resolution setting that uses varying shades of
gray for the best representation of photographs.
Polling The process of a fax machine calling another fax machine
to retrieve waiting fax messages.
Pulse A form of rotary dialing on a telephone line.
R R Passcode Your own four-digit code that allows you to call and
access your machine from a remote location.
G - 4 GLOSSARY
Real Time Transmission When memory is full, you can send faxes
in real time.
Remote Retrieval Access The ability to access your machine
remotely from a touch tone phone.
Resolution The number of vertical and horizontal lines per inch.
See: Standard, Fine, Extra Fine and Photo.
Ring Count The number of rings before the machine answers in
FAX mode.
Ring Volume Volume setting for the machine’s ring.
Save Toner A process that causes less toner to be affixed to the
page to extend the life of the toner assembly. This will make the
receiving document significantly lighter.
Scanning The process of sending an electronic image of a paper
document into your computer.
Search An electronic, alphabetical listing of stored One-Touch,
Speed Dial and Group numbers.
Speed Dial A preprogrammed number for easy dialing. You must
press the Search/Speed Dial key and then #, and the three digit
code to start the dialing process.
Standard resolution 203 x 97 dpi. It is used for regular size text
and quickest transmission.
Super fine resolution 203 x 391 dpi. Best for very small print and
line art.
TAM (telephone answering machine) You can connect an
external TAM to the EXT. jack of the machine.
Telephone Answer Code (Fax/Tel mode) When the machine
answers a voice call, it pseudo/double-rings. You can pick up at
an extension phone by pressing this code (# 51).
Temporary Settings You can select certain options for each fax
transmission and copy without changing the default settings.
Tone A form of dialing on the telephone line used for Touch Tone
telephones.
Toner cartridge An accessory that holds toner for the drum unit on
laser models.
GLOSSARY G - 5
Transmission The process of sending faxes over the phone lines
from your machine to the receiving fax machine.
True Type fonts The fonts that are used in the Windows® operating
systems. If you install the True Type fonts, more types of fonts will
be available for Windows® applications.
Unique Ring A subscriber service purchased from the telephone
company that provides another phone number on an existing
phone line. The machine uses the new number to simulate a
dedicated fax line.
View/Del jobs You can check which jobs are waiting in memory and
cancel jobs individually.
G - 6 GLOSSARY
S
Specifications
Product description
The ix2700 is 5 in 1 Multi-Function Centers: Printer, Copier, Color
Scanner, Fax, and PC Fax (via your PC). It includes Duplex Printing.
General
Memory Capacity
Optional Memory
Automatic Document
Feeder (ADF)
Paper Tray
Multi-Purpose Tray
Printer Type
Print Method
LCD (Liquid Crystal
Display)
Warm-up
Power Source
Power Consumption
Dimensions
Weight
Noise
32 MB
1 DIMM slot; Memory expandable up to 160 MB
Up to 50 pages
Temperature: 68°F - 86°F (20°C - 30°C)
Humidity: 50% - 70%
Paper: 75 g/m2 or 20 lb Letter size
250 Sheets (20 lb)
50 Sheets (20 lb)
Laser
Electrophotography by semiconductor laser beam
scanning
22 characters × 5 lines
Max. 18 seconds at 73.4°F (23°C)
120V AC 50/60Hz (USA, Canadian Version Only)
Average Operating (Copying): 440 W or less (25°C)
1090 W or less
Peak:
14 W or less
Sleep:
16 W or less (When Network LAN board
(NC-9100h) is installed.)
75 W or less (25°C)
Standby:
21.28 x 17.76 x 18.76 (in.)
532 × 444 × 469 (mm)
Without Drum/Toner Unit:
39.9 lb/18.1 kg
Operating:
53 dB A or less
Standby:
30 dB A or less
SPECIFICATIONS S - 1
Temperature
Humidity
Operating:
Storage:
Operating:
Storage:
50 - 90.5°F (10 - 32.5°C)
32 - 104°F (0 - 40°C)
20 to 80% (without condensation)
10 to 90% (without condensation)
Print media
Paper Input
Paper Tray
■ Paper type:
Plain paper, recycled paper and
transparencies, envelopes (Multi-purpose
Tray)
■ Paper size:
A4, Letter, Legal, B5 (ISO), B5 (JIS),
Executive, A5, A6, B6 (ISO)
Weight: 16 - 28 lb (60 - 105 g/m2) (Paper Tray)
For more details, see Paper specifications for
each paper tray on page 2-4.
■ Maximum paper tray capacity: Approx. 250
sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m2) plain paper
■ Maximum multi-purpose tray capacity: Approx.
50 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m2) plain paper
Multi-Purpose Tray
■ Paper size:
Width: 20 lb 2.75 - 8.66" (69.8 - 220.0 mm)
Height:
4.57 - 16.00" (116.0 - 406.4 mm)
Weight: 16 - 43 lb
(60 - 161 g/m2)
Paper Output
Up to 150 sheets of plain paper (Face down print
delivery to the output paper support)
Copy
Color/Monochrome
Monochrome
Copy Speed
Up to 17 copies/minute (Letter paper)
Multiple Copies
Stacks or Sorts up to 99 pages
Enlarge/Reduce
25% to 400% (in increments of 1%)
Resolution
Max. 1200 x 600 dpi
S - 2 SPECIFICATIONS
Fax
*
Compatibility
ITU-T Group 3
Coding System
MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
Modem Speed
33600-2400 bps
Automatic Fallback
Original Size
ADF Width:
ADF Height:
Scanner Width:
Scanner Height:
Scanning Width
8.2 inches (208 mm)
Printing Width
8.2 inches (208 mm)
Gray Scale
64 levels
Polling Types
Standard, Sequential
Contrast Control
Automatic/Light/Dark
(manual setting)
Resolution
• Horizontal 203 dot/inch (8 dot/mm)
• Vertical
• Standard 98 line/inch (3.85 line/mm)
• Fine, Photo 196 line/inch (7.7 line/mm)
• Superfine 392 line/inch (15.4 line/mm)
One-Touch Dial
40 (20 × 2)
Speed Dial
300 stations
Automatic Redial
one time
Auto Answer
0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 rings
Communication Source
Public switched telephone network.
Memory Transmission
Up to 500* pages
Out of Paper Reception
Up to 500* pages
5.8" to 8.5" (148 mm to 216 mm)
5.8" to 14.0" (148 mm to 356 mm)
Max. 8.48" (212 mm)
Max. 14.0" (356 mm)
"Pages" refers to the "ITU-T Test Chart #1" (a typical business letter, Standard resolution, JBIG code).
Specifications and printed materials are subject to change without prior notice.
SPECIFICATIONS S - 3
Scanner
Color/Monochrome
Color/Monochrome
TWAIN Compliant
Yes (Windows® 95/98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional
and Windows NT® Workstation Version 4.0)
Mac OS 8.6-9.2/OS X 10.2.1 or greater
WIA Compliant
Yes (Windows® XP)
Resolution
Up to 9,600 × 9,600 dpi (interpolated)*
Up to 600 × 2,400 dpi (optical)
* Maximum 1200 x 1200 dpi scanning with
Windows® XP (resolution up to 9600 x 9600 dpi
can be selected by using the scanner utility)
Document Size
ADF Width: 5.8" to 8.5" (148 mm to 216 mm)
ADF Height: 5.8" to 14.0" (148 mm to 356 mm)
Scanner Glass Width: Max. 8.5" (216 mm)
Scanner Glass Height: Max. 14.0" (356 mm)
Scanning Width
8.35 inches (212 mm)
Gray Scale
256 levels
Scanning directly to a networked PC is available with Windows®
98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional and XP.
OS X scanning is supported in OS X 10.2.1 or greater.
S - 4 SPECIFICATIONS
Printer
Emulation
PCL6 (Printing System for Windows® emulation
mode of HP LaserJet) and BR-Script (PostScript® )
Level 3
Printer Driver
Windows® 95/98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional/XP
and Windows NT® Workstation Version 4.0 driver
supporting Native Compression mode and
bi-directional capability
Apple® Macintosh® QuickDraw® Driver and
PostScript (PPD) for OS 8.6-9.2/OS X 10.1/10.2.1
or Greater
Resolution
HQ1200 (Max. 2400 × 600 dots/inch)
Print Quality
Normal printing mode
Economy printing mode (saves toner usage)
Print Speed
Up to 17 pages/minute letter size
(when loading paper from paper tray)
Duplex Printing
Up to 8.5 pages/minute
(8.5 sides per minute, 4.25 sheets per minute)
First Print
Up to 12 seconds (using letter/A4 size paper in
paper tray)
Interfaces
Interface
Recommended Cable
Parallel
A bi-directional shielded parallel cable that is
IEEE 1284 compliant and not longer than
6 feet (2 m).
USB
A Hi-Speed USB 2.0 cable that is not longer than
6 feet (2 m).
Please make sure that you use a Hi-Speed USB 2.0 certified
cable if your computer uses a Hi-Speed USB 2.0 interface.
Even if your computer has a USB 1.1 interface you can connect
the machine.
SPECIFICATIONS S - 5
Computer requirements
Minimum System Requirements
Processor
Minimum
Speed
Minimum
RAM
Recommended
RAM
95, 98, 98SE
Pentium
75MHz
24 MB
32 MB
Me
Pentium
150MHz
32 MB
64 MB
NT® Workstation 4.0
Pentium
75MHz
2000 Professional
Pentium
133MHz
XP
Pentium
233MHz
Computer Platform & Operating
System Version
Windows®
Operating
System
Apple®
Macintosh®
Operating
System
Mac OS X 10.1/10.2.1
or greater (Printing,
Scanning*2 , PC-FAX
Send and Remote Setup
Only)
All base
models meet
minimum
Requirements
Driver
100 MB
128 MB
180 MB
32 MB
64 MB
128 MB
160 MB
50 MB
NOTE: USB is not supported under Windows® 95 or Windows NT ® WS 4.0.
All registered trademarks referenced herein are the property of their respective companies.
■
*1
Application software is different for Windows® and
Macintosh®.
■ *2 Scanning is supported in 10.2.1 or greater.
S - 6 SPECIFICATIONS
Application
Software*1
80 MB
64 MB
OS 8.6 - 9.2
(Printing, Scanning and
PC-FAX Send Only)
Available Hard Disk Space
200 MB
Index
The items in the upper case represent LCD messages.
A
access codes, storing and
dialing ................................7-7
ADF (Automatic Document
Feeder) ............................. 6-1
ADF cover ......................... 22-4
automatic
fax receive ........................5-1
fax redial ........................... 6-8
transmission .....................6-5
B
Broadcasting ..................... 6-16
setting up Groups for ........7-4
C
Caller ID ...................5-14, 5-15
canceling
fax forwarding ................... 8-4
fax jobs in memory ......... 6-11
jobs awaiting redial ......... 6-11
paging ..............................8-4
cleaning (routine maintenance)
drum unit ......................22-26
printer ...........................22-25
scanner ........................ 22-24
CNG tones ........................ 1-13
Combine items into a single file
attachment ....................14-11
connecting
external TAD .................. 1-15
external TAM .................. 1-15
external telephone .......... 1-14
control panel, overview .......1-6
copy
contrast .........................10-16
default settings, changing
.....................................10-16
Duplex/N in 1 ................10-11
Enlarge/Reduce ..............10-7
enter Copy mode ............10-1
keys ................................10-6
multiple ...........................10-4
paper ................................2-1
scanner glass .................10-4
single .................... 10-3, 10-4
sort (ADF only) ...............10-9
temporary settings 10-2, 10-6
Tray Select ...................10-10
tray use ...........................4-10
using ADF .......................10-3
Cover sheet
composing ......................6-12
cover sheet
custom comments ..........6-13
for all faxes .....................6-15
for next fax only ..............6-14
Credit Card Numbers ..........7-7
custom telephone features 1-20
D
Date and Time .....................4-1
Delayed Batch Transmission
.........................................6-20
dialing
a pause .............................7-8
access codes and credit card
numbers ..........................7-7
automatic fax redial ..........6-8
from an external phone .....7-6
INDEX I - 1
Groups ........................... 6-16
Search ............................. 7-5
Speed Dial numbers ........ 7-6
Distinctive Ring ................. 5-11
drivers
printer ............................ 12-1
TWAIN Compliant .......... 13-1
Windows®
printer .......................... 11-1
drum unit
replacing ...................... 22-33
Dual Access ....................... 6-9
Duplex/N in 1 key ........... 10-11
Duplex/1 in 1 ................ 10-13
Duplex/2 in 1 ................ 10-15
Duplex/4 in 1 ................ 10-15
E
Easy Receive ..................... 5-4
ECM (Error Correction Mode)
......................................... 1-14
ecology
Scanner Lamp ................. 4-9
Sleep Timer ..................... 4-9
enter copy mode ............... 10-1
entering text ........................ 4-3
envelopes ........................... 2-3
error messages on LCD
Check Paper .................. 22-1
Comm. Error .................. 22-2
Not Registered ............... 22-3
Out of Memory ............... 22-3
while scanning a document
...................................... 10-5
extension telephone, using . 5-7
external telephone ............ 1-14
I - 2 INDEX
F
fax codes
Fax Receive Code ........... 5-7
Telephone Answer Code . 5-7
Fax Forwarding
changing remotely ..... 8-4, 8-5
programming a number .... 8-1
Fax Storage
printing from ..................... 5-5
fax, stand-alone
receiving ........................... 5-1
difficulty ..................... 22-13
duplex printing ............. 5-10
forwarding ..................... 8-4
polling ...................1-19, 5-9
reducing to fit on paper . 5-5
retrieving from a remote site
..................................... 8-5
ring delay, setting .......... 5-2
sending
at end of conversation ... 6-5
automatic transmission . 6-5
canceling from memory
................................... 6-11
contrast ......................... 6-6
from ADF ....................... 6-1
from memory (dual access)
6-8
from scanner glass ........ 6-3
legal size from scanner glass
..................................... 6-4
manual transmission ..... 6-4
overseas ...................... 6-18
Real Time Transmission
................................... 6-10
resolution ....................... 6-7
Fax/Tel mode ...................... 5-1
answering at extension
phones ........................... 5-7
double-ringing (voice calls)
........................................5-3
FAX Receive Code ...........5-8
receiving faxes .................5-7
Setting F/T Ring Time ......5-3
Telephone Answer Code ..5-7
FCC notices ...................... 21-1
Feature Selection table .......3-1
Memory Security ..... 6-22, 6-23
Memory Storage ..................3-1
multi-line connections (PBX)
.........................................1-20
O
G
OCR, changing setting ....15-11
One Touch numbers
storing ...............................7-1
OUT OF AREA ..................5-14
gray scale .................... S-3, S-4
Groups for Broadcasting .....7-4
P
H
HELP ...................................3-1
Help List ..............................9-3
J
jacks
convert to RJ11 jack ....... 1-18
EXT. jack
external telephone ....... 1-14
TAM (answering machine)
.................................... 1-15
triplex adapter ................ 1-18
jams
original ............................ 22-4
paper .............................. 22-4
L
LAN Configuration ............. 3-11
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
....................................1-6, 3-1
LCD Contrast ................. 4-12
M
maintenance, routine ...... 22-24
manual
receive ..............................5-1
transmission .....................6-4
Page Counter ..................22-36
Paging
programming your pager
number ...........................8-1
Paper ...........................2-1, S-2
capacity ............................2-3
jam ..................................22-4
Size ...................................4-6
size of original ...................6-1
PaperPort®
accessing ........................13-2
exporting .......................13-23
importing .......................13-22
PC FAX (For Windows®) ...17-1
receiving .......................17-18
sending
address book ...............17-7
facsimile style ............17-15
group ............................17-9
simple style ................17-16
phone line
connections ....................1-17
difficulties ......................22-13
multi-line (PBX) ...............1-20
two-line phone system ....1-18
Polling
receiving ...........................5-9
sequential receiving ........5-10
INDEX I - 3
power
failure ............................... 3-1
print
area ............................... 10-1
difficulty ........................ 22-13
driver .............................. 12-1
emulation
Windows®
............. 11-1, 11-12, 12-16
Emulation Selection ..... 11-12
envelopes ...................... 11-8
fax from memory .............. 5-5
improving the print quality
.................................... 22-17
jams .................... 22-6, 22-11
multi-purpose tray .......... 11-5
on thick paper ................ 11-6
reports and lists ........... 11-13
resolution ......................... S-5
Secure key ................... 11-11
specifications ................... S-5
two-sided (duplex printing)
...................................... 11-3
print media .......................... 2-1
printer driver ................... 12-16
PS printer driver ............. 12-16
Q
Quality key (copying) ........ 10-6
R
Receive mode
External TAM ................... 5-1
Fax Only .......................... 5-1
Fax/Tel ............................. 5-1
Manual ............................. 5-1
Redial/Pause ...................... 6-8
reducing
copies ............................ 10-7
long faxes ........................ 5-5
I - 4 INDEX
Remote Retrieval ................ 8-2
commands ....................... 8-4
getting your faxes ............. 8-5
Reports ............................... 9-1
resolution
fax (standard, Fine, Ex-Fine,
Photo) .............................S-3
print ..................................S-5
Scan ........................13-6, S-4
setting for next fax ............ 6-7
Ring Delay, setting .............. 5-2
S
Safety Instructions ......... i, 21-6
Scanner Lamp .................... 4-9
Scanner Lock .................. 22-21
Scanning into PC .............. 13-3
ScanSoft ® PaperPort® . 13-19
Scansoft ® TextBridge® OCR
.................................... 13-22
Search, for stored numbers 7-5
Setup
Date and Time ................. 4-1
Station ID (fax header) ..... 4-2
shipping the machine ...... 22-21
software
ScanSoft ® Paper Port® 13-19
SmartUI .................14-1, 15-1
Speed Dial .......................... 1-6
dialing ............................... 7-6
storing .............................. 7-1
T
TAM (Telephone Answering
Device), external
.........................1-15, 1-19, 5-1
connecting ...................... 1-14
Receive Mode .................. 5-1
Temporary Copy Settings . 10-6
text, entering ....................... 4-3
Special Characters ...........4-4
To change the default setting of
the scan, click on the Scan
Settings tab ..................... 15-9
Tone signals on Pulse line ..7-8
toner cartridge
replacing ............22-27, 22-28
tray use, setting
copy ................................ 4-10
fax .................................. 4-11
troubleshooting ................. 22-1
error messages on LCD . 22-1
if you are having difficulty
incoming calls ............22-14
paper handling ...........22-15
phone line difficulties .22-13
printer difficulties .......22-14
printing or receiving faxes
.................................. 22-13
two-line phone system ...... 1-18
V
Volume, setting ................... 4-7
beeper ..............................4-7
ring ...................................4-7
speaker ............................ 4-8
INDEX I - 5
Press 9 0.
EXIT REMOTE OPERATION
Press 9 8
then for External TAM, press 1.
Fax/Tel, press 2.
Fax Only, press 3.
CHANGE RECEIVE MODE
1 long beep — Fax messages
3 short beeps — No messages
Press 9 7 1
CHECK RECEIVING STATUS
4
Using Remote Access Code
1 Dial your fax number from a telephone or fax machine using
touch tone.
2 When your machine answers, immediately enter your
Remote Access Code (3 digits followed by ).
3 Your machine signals the kinds of messages it received:
1 long beep — Fax messages
No beeps — No messages.
4 After 2 short beeps, enter a command.
5 Press 9 0 to reset your machine when you finish.
6 Hang up.
REMOTE RETRIEVAL ACCESS CARD
1
Remote Retrieval Access card
If you plan to receive fax messages while away from your machine,
carrying the Remote Retrieval Access Card printed below will serve
as a convenient reminder of the retrieval procedures. Simply cut out
the card and fold it to fit your wallet or organizer. Keeping it handy will
help you derive the full benefit of your machine’s Forwarding, Paging
and Remote Retrieval features.
Fold
Fold
REMOTE RETRIEVAL ACCESS CARD R - 1
Changing R R Passcode
1 Press Menu, 2, 5, 1.
or
to select Remote Retrieve and then
2 Press
press Enter.
The
to select Local Print On (or Off) and then
cannot be changed.
3 Enter a three-digit number from 000 to 999.
press Enter.
4 Press Enter.
or
5 Press
6 Press Stop.
2
Remote Commands
Remote Rtrv/FAX FORWARDING SETTING
Press 9 5.
then to Turn feature off, press 1.
Select Remote Rtrv, press 2.
Select Fax Forwarding, press 3.
Program Fax Forwarding Number press 4. Enter the new
fax number where you want your fax messages forwarded,
and press # #.
RETRIEVE A FAX
Press 9 6.
then to
Retrieve all faxes, press 2,
then enter the number of remote fax machine, and press
# #. After the beep, hang up and wait.
Erase all fax messages, press 3.
3
R-2
Fold
Fold
EQUIPMENT ATTACHMENT LIMITATIONS
(Canada only)
NOTICE
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical
specifications.
NOTICE
The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum
number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface.
The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of
devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all
the devices does not exceed five.
2003
FX30093
09.01.03